This is only a preview of the March 2023 issue of Silicon Chip. You can view 37 of the 104 pages in the full issue, including the advertisments. For full access, purchase the issue for $10.00 or subscribe for access to the latest issues. Articles in this series:
Items relevant to "The Digital Potentiometer":
Items relevant to "Model Railway Turntable":
Items relevant to "ZPB30A1 30V 10A DC Load":
Items relevant to "Active Mains Soft Starter, Part 2":
Items relevant to "Advanced Test Tweezers, Part 2":
Purchase a printed copy of this issue for $11.50. |
MARCH 2023
ISSN 1030-2662
03
The VERY BEST DIY Projects!
9 771030 266001
$ 50* NZ $1290
11
INC GST
INC GST
[ 3 1 ] Digital Volume Control Potentiometer
A drop-in replacement for a volume control potentiometer
[ 42 ] Model Railway Turntable
An excellent addition to nearly any model railway layout
[ 56 ] Altium Designer 23
Covering the software’s newest features
[ 62 ] 30V 10A DC Load Module
A programmable constant-current DC Load
...plus much more inside
how we communicate
underwater
ADD MOTION DETECTION
TO YOUR PROJECT
PIR MOTION
DETECTION MODULE
ADD OBSTACLE DETECTION
OR AVOIDANCE
DUAL ULTRASONIC
SENSOR MODULE
• Adjustable delay times
XC4444 $6.95
• 2 - 45cm 15° range
XC4442 $8.95
Expand your projects with our
extensive range of Arduino® compatible
Modules, Shields &
Accessories.
OVER 100 TYPES TO CHOOSE FROM AT GREAT PRICES.
ADDRESSABLE RGB LEDS
DETECT WHEN PLANTS
NEED WATERING
SOIL MOISTURE
SENSOR MODULE
• Analogue output
XC4604 $4.95
VIEW OVER 70 ARDUINO®
PROJECTS YOU CAN BUILD
AT: jaycar.com.au/projects
Shop at Jaycar for:
• Arduino® Compatible
Development Boards
• Display Modules
• Servos, Solenoids & Motors
• Wheels & Chassis
1.3" MONOCHROME
OLED DISPLAY
• 128x64 Pixel
XC3728 $19.95
ADD AMAZING COLOUR
TO YOUR NEXT PROJECT
5V LED STRIP WITH 120
ADDRESSABLE RGB LEDS
HALL EFFECT
SENSOR MODULE
• 2m long, flexible, waterproof
XC4390 $34.95
• Sense magnetic presence
XC4434 $4.95
• Prototyping Hardware
and Accessories
• Project Enclosures
• Servos & Motors
• Switches & relays
Explore our wide range of Arduino® compatible modules, shields and accessories,
in stock on our website, or at over 110 stores or 130 resellers nationwide.
Prices correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
jaycar.com.au/shieldsmodules
1800 022 888
Contents
Vol.36, No.03
March 2023
14 Underwater Communication
There are many challenges when trying to communicate underwater using
current technology. We take a look at how voice & data is transmitted
through the sea to and from submarines, drones and other vessels.
By Dr David Maddison
Technology feature
Digital Volume Control
Potentiometers
56 Altium Designer 23
Page 31
We were keen to see what the latest version of Altium’s electronics design
automation software had to offer. New features include multiple IC pin
functions, Design Reuse Blocks and better MCAD integration.
By Tim Blythman
Software review
62 ZPB30A1 30V 10A DC Load
This programmable constant-current DC load can be used to test power
supplies and check the capacity of batteries. It’s a self-contained device
that delivers good value for money.
By Jim Rowe
Using electronic modules
31 The Digital Potentiometer
This drop-in replacement for a volume control potentiometer uses a digital
IC, providing it with excellent tracking and reliable long-term performance.
You can choose to build it in a compact SMD or easier through-hole version.
By Phil Prosser
Volume control project
42 Model Railway Turntable
An excellent addition to just about any model railway layout. This project
lets you turn a locomotive around at the end of a track and automatically
reverses power to the track, stopping it from shorting out.
By Les Kerr
Model railway project
68 Active Mains Soft Starter, Part 2
We finish off the new Active Mains Soft Starter by covering how to
assemble, test and calibrate it. The Soft Starter is ideal for eliminating the
‘kick’ from power tools rated up to 750W.
By John Clarke
Mains control project
74 Advanced Test Tweezers, Part 2
These Test Tweezers are not just for testing passive components, they
can also act as a digital voltmeter, logic probe, oscilloscope, square wave
generator and serial protocol analyser. In the last part of the series, we
cover the construction details and how best to use the Tweezers.
By Tim Blythman
Test equipment project
Page 42
Model Railway
Turntable
ADVANCED Page 74
TEST
SMD
T EEZERS
2
Editorial Viewpoint
5
Mailbag
13
Subscriptions
55
Product Showcase
83
Serviceman’s Log
90
Vintage Radio
95
Circuit Notebook
98
Online Shop
Three STC radios by Graham Parslow
1. Regenerative BFO metal detector
2. 3D-printed robotic arm
100
Ask Silicon Chip
103
Market Centre
104
Advertising Index
104
Notes & Errata
SILICON
SILIC
CHIP
www.siliconchip.com.au
Publisher/Editor
Nicholas Vinen
Technical Editor
John Clarke – B.E.(Elec.)
Technical Staff
Jim Rowe – B.A., B.Sc.
Bao Smith – B.Sc.
Tim Blythman – B.E., B.Sc.
Advertising Enquiries
(02) 9939 3295
adverts<at>siliconchip.com.au
Regular Contributors
Allan Linton-Smith
Dave Thompson
David Maddison – B.App.Sc. (Hons 1),
PhD, Grad.Dip.Entr.Innov.
Geoff Graham
Associate Professor Graham Parslow
Dr Hugo Holden – B.H.B, MB.ChB.,
FRANZCO
Ian Batty – M.Ed.
Phil Prosser – B.Sc., B.E.(Elec.)
Cartoonist
Louis Decrevel
loueee.com
Founding Editor (retired)
Leo Simpson – B.Bus., FAICD
Silicon Chip is published 12 times
a year by Silicon Chip Publications
Pty Ltd. ACN 626 922 870. ABN 20
880 526 923. All material is copyright ©. No part of this publication
may be reproduced without the written
consent of the publisher.
Subscription rates (Australia only)
6 issues (6 months): $65
12 issues (1 year):
$120
24 issues (2 years):
$230
Online subscription (Worldwide)
6 issues (6 months): $50
12 issues (1 year):
$95
24 issues (2 years):
$185
For overseas rates, see our website or
email silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
Recommended & maximum price only.
Editorial office: Unit 1 (up ramp), 234
Harbord Rd, Brookvale, NSW 2100.
Postal address: PO Box 194,
Matraville, NSW 2036.
Phone: (02) 9939 3295.
ISSN: 1030-2662
Printing and Distribution:
Editorial Viewpoint
An AI wrote the editorial for me
What would be a good topic for an editorial in
Silicon Chip magazine?
A good topic could be the latest developments in microcontroller technology and their applications in various fields, the current trends in electronics design and
the challenges faced by designers and engineers, the
impact of emerging technologies such as the Internet
of Things (IoT) and artificial intelligence (AI) on the
electronics industry, or a review of new and innovative electronic products
that are available on the market.
The editorial could also cover topics such as electronics hobby projects and
DIY (Do It Yourself).
Write 400-450 words about the impact of AI on the electronics industry:
Artificial Intelligence (AI) has been making its presence felt in the electronics
industry for quite some time now. The technology has been rapidly advancing
and its applications in various fields have increased significantly. The impact
of AI on the electronics industry has been far-reaching and profound.
One of the primary ways AI has impacted the electronics industry is through
the development of smart and autonomous devices. These devices are capable
of collecting, processing and analyzing data in real-time, making them more
efficient and effective in performing their designated tasks.
For example, AI-powered smart home devices can automatically adjust
the temperature, lights and other environmental factors based on the habits
and preferences of their owners. In the automotive sector, AI is being used to
develop self-driving cars that can navigate roads and make decisions without
human intervention.
Another significant impact of AI on the electronics industry is the increased
speed and accuracy of electronic design and testing. AI algorithms can analyze
vast amounts of data and identify trends, patterns and anomalies that would
be impossible for a human to detect.
This has allowed for the development of more complex and sophisticated
electronic systems, and has also reduced the time and resources required for
testing and validation.
AI has also opened up new opportunities for the electronics industry by creating new and innovative products. For example, AI-powered wearable devices
and smart speakers are becoming increasingly popular and have created a new
market for electronics manufacturers.
Similarly, AI has been used to develop voice-controlled virtual assistants
that can perform a range of tasks, from playing music to managing schedules
and making reservations.
However, the impact of AI on the electronics industry is not just limited to
product development. It has also had a significant impact on the workforce
in the industry. AI and automation have replaced many manual and repetitive tasks, freeing up workers to focus on higher-level tasks such as design,
research and innovation.
However, the increased use of AI has also raised concerns about job displacement, particularly among workers in low-skilled roles.
In conclusion, AI has had a profound impact on the electronics industry
and is changing the way we live and work. Its applications are far-reaching
and its impact is only set to increase in the future. As the technology continues
to evolve, it will be interesting to see how the electronics industry continues
to incorporate AI and how it will shape the future of electronics and beyond.
– ChatGPT by OpenAI (https://openai.com/) with prompt from Silicon Chip
Extremely impressive, but I don’t think my job is in danger just yet…
by Nicholas Vinen
24-26 Lilian Fowler Pl, Marrickville 2204
2
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Ordering made easy
Tools to search, check stock and purchase
au.mouser.com/servicesandtools
australia<at>mouser.com
MAILBAG
your feedback
Letters and emails should contain complete name, address and daytime phone number. Letters to the Editor are submitted on the condition that
Silicon Chip Publications Pty Ltd has the right to edit, reproduce in electronic form, and communicate these letters. This also applies to submissions to “Ask Silicon Chip”, “Circuit Notebook” and “Serviceman’s Log”.
An easier way to upload WiFi DC Load software
Several constructors of the WiFi DC Load project (September & October 2022; siliconchip.au/Series/388) have
noted that the new Arduino 2.0 IDE does not have a facility to upload files to the ESP32 file system.
I have written a utility to accomplish these tasks. It
is located at https://github.com/palmerr23/ESP32-OTAand-File-Manager
Richard Palmer, Murrumbeena, Vic.
Suggestion on improving ESP32 WiFi range
The WiFi DC Load project uses an ESP32 board with a
PCB WiFi antenna. After assembly of the control board,
I experienced problems with poor WiFi signal and the
device refused to connect to my network.
The WAP (WiFi access point) is some distance from
my workshop, and the WiFi signal is attenuated by the
building, hence the weak signal.
To overcome this, I replaced the ESP32 board with the
WROOM version which has a UMCC connector for an
external WiFi antenna. I mounted the external antenna on
the front panel to the left of the screen. The external WiFi
antenna, which has a higher gain than the PCB antenna
and is mounted outside the metal enclosure, solved the
poor signal problems.
Erwin Bejsta, Wodonga, Vic.
Partially defunct multimeter giveaway
I have a Agilent U1253A meter that does not power on
properly with a fresh 9V battery, but when turned on, it
plays a brief melody, and all buttons produce a beep when
pressed. Do any readers want it for spare parts, for the cost
of postage? It includes a charger, CD and calibration certificate (2010) but no leads and comes in the original box.
Ric Mabury, Melville, WA.
Receiving signals from Sputnik
Thank you for printing the Sputnik transmitter circuit
(January 2023, page 29; siliconchip.au/Article/15612).
I recall hearing the beep beep on my shortwave radio,
on which I first found the precise US WWV frequency
standard transmitter on 20MHz, then tuned slightly HF
to 20007kHz with BFO engaged. There were no digital
radios in those days!
I wonder if the maximum usable frequency (MUF)
during those days was significantly below 20MHz; otherwise, presumably, signals would not have penetrated
the ionosphere, whereas the WWV signals were reflected.
It could have something to do with wave incident angles
as well.
siliconchip.com.au
Apparently, Sputnik had two transmitters. One was
at 20.005MHz, not 20.007MHz as I had indicated, plus
a second at 40.002MHz. I would not have known it was
2kHz off with a pre-digital receiver. I guess they deliberately plonked it next to WWV so people could find it.
They assumed a worldwide response from amateurs that
would enhance their research base.
However, I don’t know how they expected the feedback
as there was no email etc.
Sputnik was launched into a highly elliptical orbit, and
part of that was evidently to explore communications
back through the ionosphere’s different layers. I read that
the MUF (they called it something else) was estimated at
15MHz at the time.
I was amused to see they had wired the three valve filaments in series; perhaps this was ‘communism in the
design’ that ensured all got the same or nothing!
Dave Kitson, Claremont, WA.
Errors in the Sputnik circuit
The Sputnik circuit published on page 29 of the January 2023 issue has some errors, many of which are either
errors in the original documentation or in the copies which
are circulating. It was not a 2W transmitter; Sputnik had
two 1W transmitters, but they were not operating simultaneously; the Manipulator relay alternately switched
them on and off.
The schematic Allan Linton-Smith found was likely
taken from a Dutch amateur radio magazine published
in 2016, or a copy of that.
The Dutch author discovered a missing dot at the junction of the 91W and 240W resistors, which was explained
in their text but not corrected on the diagram you copied. The odd thing was that the dot was missing from
the 40MHz unit in the original design schematic, not the
20MHz one. So I think there was some mix-up between
the two circuits in the past.
Also, inductors L1 & L2 are a common-mode choke in
a 20mm square, rectangular canister with a glued slug,
although not drawn that way on the diagram.
Also, in the unit, the common negative of all of the +
supplies (called A- in the unit’s original documentation)
connects to the -7.5V supply, not the +7.5V supply. The
+7.5V passes via a resistor in the main transmitter housing, not in the module, to supply the heater chain.
There is also a missing capacitor that was in the physical 20MHz unit itself but not on the schematic.
Regardless of these small details, I am a really big fan
of this circuit, especially the 20MHz module.
I think it would be great to write up the circuit in a lot
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 5
of detail for the Vintage Radio section, as I have all the
original design information, and it is from such a famous
spacecraft. However, it will be several months before I can
finish making a replica and write it up.
Dr Hugo Holden, Minyama, Qld.
Can AI be used for checking designs?
I read with interest your January editorial regarding
PCB errors and how to avoid them. I hadn’t appreciated
how complicated that task is. It got me thinking that this
might be an ideal job for artificial intelligence (AI).
You obviously have a very well-educated and professional staff and many very capable contributors. How
about developing an AI system for this purpose? You could
report on the progress along the way. I am sure your readers would be very interested in it. Such a system would
be of great financial value.
Mauri Lampi, Glenroy, Vic.
Response: AI would not be all that helpful for DRC (Design
Rule Check) since the rules are pretty basic and easy to
enforce. You just have to input them correctly (manufacturers often supply files you can import that do that for
you) and actually click the button to check them. However, you do raise two interesting points.
Firstly, could AI be used to detect less obvious errors
in circuits and PCB designs? It certainly would be worth
a try. We’re impressed with what AI can achieve already
(see this month’s editorial). Even if the possible problems it raised were often irrelevant, it could catch some
non-obvious design faults before the prototype stage, similarly to how grammar checkers can helpfully flag some
errors in text. The thing is that AI research is a very specialised field.
Secondly, could AI be created to design a circuit and/or
PCB from scratch? Apparently, Altium Designer already
incorporates such features; something we should investigate.
Two different OLEDs are compatible
I wrote in a while back regarding a problem I had with
the screen on my Improved SMD Test Tweezers (April
2022; siliconchip.au/Article/15276). When operated in
the left-hand mode, the display lost a column, causing
the OLED screen characters to be not quite right.
I went to use the tweezers the other day and found the
OLED display to have failed. As I had a couple of the larger
0.96in cyan displays and nothing to lose, I decided to fit
one. Curiously and to my surprise, the LH mode now displays correctly! Switching back to the 0.49”in OLED, the
missing column fault returns.
While I am running the updated PIC in the tweezers,
the fault was also present with the original version of
the software.
You could mention this upgrade or hack to your readers, as the bigger display is a lot easier to read with my
older eyes.
Stu Cornall, Pialba, Qld.
T12 soldering irons recommended
I am an occasional reader of your magazine and would
like to suggest that you alert readers to the “T12” soldering irons as they have significant advantages in cost and
flexibility. If you have not tried these, I suggest the KSGER
6
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Discover New Technologies in Electronics
and High-Tech Manufacturing
See, test and compare the latest technology, products and turnkey solutions for your business
SMCBA CONFERENCE
The Electronics Design and Manufacturing Conference
delivers the latest critical information for design and assembly.
Industry experts will present technical workshops with the
latest innovations and solutions.
Details at www.smcba.asn.au
In Association with
Supporting Publication
Organised by
Co-located with
branded irons for reasonable quality, with a four-second
heat up, many sleep modes and cheap and easy-to-change
change tips, similar to Hakko’s.
Lindsay Mannix, Yakamia, WA.
Alternative way of generating a negative bias voltage
Part of the 30V 2A Bench Supply circuit (October 2022;
siliconchip.au/Series/389) reminded me of a brilliant
design feature in the lab supply I have been using since
1970. That supply was a project designed by a Tektronix
engineer for the Boy Scout Explorer Post 876 (sponsored
by Tektronix). It generated a negative bias voltage using
a simple voltage doubler.
Two diodes and two capacitors are connected to the
same transformer winding that delivers the output power.
Applied to your design, just add a capacitor between
diode D3’s cathode and an AC pin of BR1. Diode D4’s
anode needs to move to D3’s cathode and you can eliminate the 30V winding of your transformer. Select the
capacitor value to produce the desired negative bias
voltage.
50 years later, I am still learning new subtleties in the
design of my Explorer Post power supply. It used 14 transistors (no ICs) and a transformer with a single untapped
secondary winding to supply 0-10V at 0-1A controlled by
two 10-turn potentiometers with resolution and accuracy
better than an analog meter. Two light bulbs indicated
when it was regulating voltage or current limiting.
When I built mine, I made many extensions to the
design, adding to the learning experience. Most extensions have been beneficial, but some have caused device
failures over the years. I wish I could give credit to the
original circuit designer, but I lost my copy of the original
schematic more than 30 years ago. I only have the transcribed diagram I drew when I was in college.
Sigurd Peterson, Aloha, Oregon, USA.
Warning about dodgy WeMos D1 Mini modules
I purchased three WeMos D1 Mini V4.0.0 modules from
the UK. Of them, two exhibited voltage regulator problems
as follows. I have advised the eBay seller of these findings.
After programming them for the GPS Clock project,
the blue LED turns on immediately after the module is
powered on.
My first test used a 5V 3A supply connected to the
module’s VBUS(5V)/GND connections. I connected, disconnected, reconnected etc, the 5V supply 30 times at
two-second intervals. The blue LED failed to illuminate
a total of 23 times. The LED operated on seven occasions.
The next test used a variable 2A DC supply set to 3.3V,
connected to the 3V3/GND connections, repeating the
connection/disconnection sequence above. The blue LED
operated 30 out of the 30 times.
This confirms that the ESP8266 chips are fine, and the
problem is that the 5V-to-3.3V regulator is problematic
regarding, I’m assuming, supplying the peak startup current of the ESP8266.
I then connected the module to the computer’s USB
port. When I repeated the connect/disconnect sequence
at its USB socket, the blue LED failed to operate on 20
of the 30 occasions and lit on 10 occasions. This is the
fundamental pass/fail indicator and the easiest to check!
This confirms that the computer’s USB connection is
8
Silicon Chip
operating similarly to the external 5V supply, and the
computer’s USB socket can provide the necessary peak
current in the same manner as the external 5V supply.
Whenever the blue LED fails to illuminate while the
module is being powered by the external 5V supply or
the USB connection, the voltage at the 3V3 connection
(the output of the regulator) reads about 1.9V.
Whenever the blue LED lights, the module can be
re-programmed without error. The stored program also
runs fine, and the NTP timestamp is acquired (after the
configuration setup has been done). However, when the
LED does not illuminate, the module cannot be reprogrammed, and the programmer reports that the ESP8266
cannot be found.
I received three V3.0.0 modules from Altronics this
morning, Cat Z6441, listed as a “NEW” product. All three
work perfectly!
Graeme Dennes, Bunyip, Vic.
Comments: that’s interesting, but based on your previous
experiences, sadly, not surprising. It’s good to hear that
the Altronics product works.
We wonder if it is time to refresh the Clayton’s GPS project with the Pico W board in place of the D1 Mini. That
should work quite well as it has a switchmode regulator
for its 3.3V supply.
More on RFI and EMI
RF interference from LED lamps of all types has been a
problem ever since they were introduced. Marcus Chick
describes his experience with this in Mailbag, January
2023. He suggested a resistor/capacitor network could be
used instead of the switch-mode driver to eliminate the
interference problem. However, I agree with your response
that this may result in power factor problems.
The LED Party Strobe project in the January 2014 issue
(siliconchip.au/Article/5673) showed that LED lights can
be energised directly from a DC power source. I have successfully used this with MR16-style lamps and floodlights
after removing the switch-mode driver and using a suitable series resistor to limit the current.
Switch-mode power supplies have high efficiency and
low cost when compared to transformer-equipped linear
supplies. However, as Marcus discovered, sourcing LED
lights with low emissions can be difficult. My use of a
transformer linear supply is less efficient than a switchmode unit, but it does have the advantage of no detectable interference.
Stan Woithe, Fulham Gardens, SA.
And even more on EMI & RFI
I would like to comment on the letter on AM reception
difficulties in the February issue (page 7).
I have been repairing valve radios since the late 1960s.
In that time, RFI has gradually increased, with little, if any,
policing (it must be all about revenue). Being rural, RF
riding on the kilometres of aerial power lines has always
been evident, and we need mains filters to get rid of as
much as possible as it gets into the radios.
The thing that we cannot get rid of is the ability of the
valve radio to pick up lighting [sic] over vast distances.
The real fun starts when you want to calibrate a radio.
To get anything approaching radio silence, there are many
items to shut off:
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Keep your electronics
clean, lubricated and protected.
Service Aids & Essentials.
GREAT RANGE. GREAT VALUE.
In-stock at your conveniently located stores nationwide.
4
2
1
5
3
BUY IN BULK & SAVE!!!
1
Isopropyl Alcohol
99.8% 250ml Spray NA1066
BUY 1+ $7.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $7.15 EA.
BUY 10+ $6.35 EA.
99.8% 300g Aerosol NA1067
BUY 1+ $11.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $10.45 EA.
BUY 10+ $9.45 EA.
70% 1 Litre Bottle NA1071
BUY 1+ $19.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $17.95 EA.
BUY 10+ $15.95 EA.
2
Electronic Parts
Cleaning Solution
1 Litre Bottle NA1070
BUY 1+ $15.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $13.95 EA.
BUY 10+ $12.45 EA.
3
Liquid Electrical Tape
28g Tubes, Red or Black
NM2836-NM2838
BUY 1+ $21.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $19.45 EA.
BUY 10+ $17.45 EA.
4
175g Aerosols
Contact Cleaner Lubricant NA1012
Electronic Cleaning Solvent NA1004
BUY 1+
$12.95 EA.
BUY 4+
$11.45 EA.
BUY 10+
$9.95 EA.
PTFE Dry Lubricant NA1013
BUY 1+
$15.95 EA.
BUY 4+
$13.95 EA.
BUY 10+
$12.45 EA.
5
J-B Weld Products
J-B Weld Epoxy 28g NA1518
BUY 1+ $17.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $15.95 EA.
BUY 10+ $13.95 EA.
SuperWeld Extreme 15g NA1539
BUY 1+ $14.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $13.45 EA.
WaterWeld 57g NA1532
BUY 1+ $23.95 EA.
BUY 4+ $21.45 EA.
BUY 10+ $18.95 EA.
Shop at Jaycar for even more
service aids & essentials:
• Adhesives & Insulation Tapes
• Solder & Soldering Aids
• Wire & Heatshrink Tubing
Explore our full range of service aids, in stock at
over 110 stores, or 130 resellers or on our website.
• Fasteners & Cable Ties
• Ultrasonic Cleaners
• Tools & Workbench Accessories
jaycar.com.au/serviceaids
1800 022 888
Prices correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
• Wireless NBN: symphony orchestra (and carrier
pigeon would be quicker).
• UPS: noise.
• Computer, circa 2000: noise.
• Switch-mode supplies: almost everything.
• LED lighting: another wide-range transmitter.
• Electronic ballasts: especially the ones in 4ft fluorescent tube fittings; I’m lucky if they run for more than four
years before failing or becoming noisy.
I have even had a fax use the telephone line as a radiator, getting into the 175kHz IF via the 37m external radio
antenna. My mobile also needs an antenna to avoid dropouts, connecting to a 3G tower 40km away.
Marcus Chick, Wangaratta, Vic.
Earth Leakage Detector will work with three-phase
I want to challenge your response to B.T.’s query on
“Testing three-phase gear for Earth leakage” in the Ask
Silicon Chip section of July 2022 (p110).
The toroid cannot tell whether two wires (for a single-
phase circuit) or three or four wires (for a three-phase circuit) are threaded through it. All it detects is a magnetic
field, and its magnitude depends on the sum of the currents passing through its centre. This sum must, of course,
consider the direction of current flow in the wires. Say,
positive towards the load; negative away from it.
If there is no Earth leakage current, the sum of the currents in a three-phase, three- or four-wire circuit at any
given instant is always zero. The 120° phase shifts between
the phases do not affect this. Also, there is no need to divide
the leakage current by √3 since it is the sum of the currents
(which must be the current flowing to Earth) that is being
measured in both the single-phase and three-phase cases.
The Silicon Chip Earth Leakage Tester (May 2015 issue;
siliconchip.au/Article/8553) should work without modification for both single-phase and three-phase circuits. In
either case, B.T. should confirm that all wires go through
the toroid in the same direction, ie, from source to load,
and that the measuring instrument, like the Silicon Chip
design, is measuring true RMS.
Chris Armstrong, Peakhurst, NSW.
Comment: You are correct. Passing all three-phase wires
through a single core produces what is known as a Zero
Sequence Current Transformer (ZSCT), also known as
Core Balanced Current Transformer (CBCT). If there is no
Earth leakage, the current output from the current transformer will be zero. Any current leakage will provide an
imbalance, and the current transformer will give a reading other than zero.
Variable feed-in tariff is desirable
George Ramsay (Mailbag, December 2022, p9) need
not be so pessimistic about rooftop solar power generation. The distribution network was never designed for
distributed generation, but that doesn’t mean it can’t
be adapted.
The big difference between rooftop solar and other generation types is that it is largely uncontrolled and so is
often on when it isn’t needed. Having too much generation in a grid can be as problematic as not having enough.
The solution is both technical and commercial. Most
rooftop PV owners are paid a fixed rate for feed-in, regardless of whether the grid needs them. This price has been
10
Silicon Chip
in steady decline, and one reason is that it is essentially
a hedge that accounts for when they are providing useful
generation, but also when they aren’t.
A better approach is to offer a price representative of
the grid. This is known as the wholesale price and fluctuates every five minutes to match supply and demand.
When the wholesale price goes negative, grid participants
are signalling that there is excess generation, and they are
happy to pay you to consume it.
In this situation, rooftop PV owners will have a better
financial outcome if they turn it off. They will also get
much better feed-in rates at other times when the grid
needs them.
There also needs to be the technical means to turn off
your inverter. The latest version of AS4777.2 (Inverter
Technical Standards) mandates all inverters be compatible with DRED (Demand Response Enabling Device),
a standardised interface for control (see the April 2017
issue; siliconchip.au/Article/10606).
Most modern inverters can also be controlled over an
API and via standard industrial automation protocols
like Modbus.
Rooftop PV is one of the cheapest ways to generate electricity. With these simple solutions, rooftop PV owners
can earn more coin and help our grid transition to a new
generation mix. Many retailers are already offering products like this, known as “time-of-use” tariffs.
Brandon, Alexandria, NSW.
Comment: while it makes a certain amount of sense to
pay more for power when it’s needed the most, it’s hard
to see how that will help in this case. Homeowners can’t
decide when their solar systems can generate power; that’s
mainly a function of the sun. Also, while it is an imperfect system, demand is already signalled in a sense by
grid voltage fluctuations.
AC mains electricity protection filters
Reading your article on the DC Supply Filter for Vehicles (November 2022; siliconchip.au/Article/15544) got
me thinking about AC mains electricity protection filters.
How does EMP shielding work? Is this a hoax or snake
oil? How does a good AC mains electricity surge protector work against downed power lines, lightning strikes,
EMP, solar storms and the like?
There was a three-day May 1921 solar geomagnetic
storm, also known as the “New York Railroad Storm”,
see www.solarstorms.org/SS1921.html
Could this be a future project? Most of us do not need
expensive uninterruptible power supplies. Still, we need
reliable over-voltage surge protection and brownout protection, particularly if you live in a rural area, flood zone
or coastal area with frequent large storms. And especially
if we also own lots of expensive electrical goods and consumer electronics.
Bob Crowhurst, Mitchell Park, SA.
Comments: there do not seem to be suitable surge protectors commercially available for protection against lightning except for switchboard-installed devices.
The PDF file you can download from siliconchip.au/
link/abi4 shows just how much needs to be done for complete lightning protection.
We may consider a lightning protector for mains electrical appliances as a project. The most significant difficulty
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Established 1930
Digital Caliper
70-605 - Measuring Box set
M012 - Measuring Kit 4 Piece
• CNC Machined for high accuracy
• Ground Measuring Face
• Black Anodized Coating
for a Protective Anti Rust
Coating
• Precision Laser
Engraved Markings
79 (Q605)
•
•
•
•
SAVE $20
0 - 25mm micrometer
150mm / 6" rule
150mm / 6" vernier
100 x 70mm square
70-634 - Spring
Divider
•
•
•
•
60 (M012)
$
NEW RELEASE
• 3 Modes of measurement IP54
• Absolute & incremental functionality
• 4-way measuring
$
150mm overall length
Hardened spring and legs
Knurled thumb screw
Polished finish
14 (Q634)
$
• 200mm / 8"
• 150mm / 6"
49 (M742)
35 (M740)
$
$
SAVE $10.40
SAVE $9
70-636
Spring Caliper
Outside
70-635
Spring Caliper
Inside
• 150mm overall length
• 150mm overall length
14 (Q636)
14 (Q635)
$
$
MEASURING EQUIPMENTS
SAVE $11.50
70-630 - Double Ended Scriber
70-601 - Degree Protractor
SSR-150 - STEEL RULE
SSR-300 - STEEL RULE
•
•
•
•
• 0-180º range
• 0-100mm rule graduations
• 150mm rule length
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
190mm in length
Straight & 90º hardened steel tips
Precision manufactured
Knurled body for grip
12 (Q630)
27.50 (Q601)
DRO5 - 3-Axis Optimum Digital
Readout Counter - 1µm
•
•
•
•
•
•
3 (M755)
$
Suits mills X, Y, Z Axis
Suits lathes X, Y, Z Axis + (Z0) RPM speed
4 x LCD screen colour options
Metric / inches conversion
98 x 65 x 134mm (LxWxH)
240V with 6 metre lead
349 (D695)
$
SAVE 47
$
BF-20AV - Opti-Mill Head
Attachment - Geared &
Tilting Head
WORK LIGHT
$
HL-72L - 14W LED
Work Light with 2.25X
Magnifier
•
•
•
•
•
14W - 5700K LED
Dimmer control
Swivel & pivoting arm
Includes magnified lens
240V / 10amp
199 (L2821)
$
ST-2506V - Lathe Stand
• Suits TU-2506V & TU-3008G
Optimum Lathes
1,045 (M647)
SAVE $110
$
LED Slim Rechargeable
Handheld Work Light
LED Rechargeable
Handheld Work Light
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Max output:360 lumens
3.7V 1800mAh Li-ion battery
Rechargeable via USB
3 hours operating time
Modes: 100% - 50%-strobe-Off
Dimmable light
Magnet both ends
18 (T950)
TU-2506V - Opti-Turn
Bench Lathe
• Ø250 x 550mm turning capacity
• 26mm bore, 125mm 3 jaw chuck
• 1.2kW, 240V motor
Max output: 400 lumens
3.7V 2600mAh Li-ion battery
Rechargeable via USB
3 hours operating time
4 Modes: White COB, Red
COB, Top Light On-Off,
Spotlight On-Off
33 (T9501)
$
SAVE $43
300mm with 0.5 & 1mm graduations
12" with 32nds, 64ths, 16ths graduations
Overall size 300 X 25.4 X 0.8mm
Metric and imperial measurements
5 (M756)
$
• Electronic variable
speed
• 3MT spindle taper
• Dovetail vertical Z-Axis
• Head tilts ±90°
• 0.85kW 240V
motor
$
150mm with 0.5 & 1mm graduations
6" with 32nds, 64ths, 16ths graduations
Overall size 150 X 19 X 0.8mm
Metric and imperial measurements
$
TU-1503V - Opti-Turn
Bench Lathe - Mini
•
•
•
•
Ø150 x 300mm turning capacity
11mm spindle bore
80mm 3 jaw chuck
0.45kW, 240V motor
ONIC
ELECTR PEEDS
LE S
B
IA
R
A
V
00RPM
160 ~ 30
429 (L690)
2,299(L689)
$
$
SAVE $66
SAVE $220
www.machineryhouse.com.au
SYDNEY
BRISBANE
MELBOURNE
PERTH
(02) 9890 9111
(07) 3715 2200
(03) 9212 4422
(08) 9373 9999
Specifications & Prices are subject to change without notification. All prices include GST and valid until 27-03-23
899 (L685)
$
SAVE $80
UNIQUE PROMO CODE
SIC2302
$70 FREE
DISCOUNT VOUCHERS
ONLINE OR INSTORE!
www.machineryhouse.com.au/signup
is how to test it. We have published brownout protectors
previously, although incorporating brownout and lightning protection in one project is a good idea. Consider
looking at the July 2016 Brownout Protector For Induction Motors (siliconchip.au/Article/10000).
Regarding solar storms, there does not appear to be any
good way to protect against these, except for the magnetic
field around the earth that reduces the effect. The best
thing about it is that it’s free!
In the November 2021 issue, you published an image
I sent of a magazine cover featuring an unusual portable
radio. This cover of Radio-Craft magazine from June 1942
(below) shows another radio headset to detect aircraft.
If you arrived at the airport wearing this today, I think
they would bring out the white jackets to take you away!
Graham Street, Auckland, New Zealand.
with service information (eg, service manuals and schematics, help lines via telephone) and spare parts. I do not
know how Consumer Protection allows them to get away
with such practices.
Over the last 20 years, I have visited politicians (specifically Louise Asher), but to no avail. For years afterwards, they tell you, “yes, looking into it”, but nothing
ever happens.
The best you can do as a tech is not to recommend those
products. Try approaching Apple for a spare part (eg, an
IC or a service manual). With their non-availability, honestly, as an engineer, could you recommend their product
with such (nil) support?
No wonder 90% of service organisations have shut
down: there is little work to do and no parts available.
Just ask Dave Thompson why he has had to diversify servicing anything from electric brooms to TVs.
Rod Humphris, Ferntree Gully, Vic.
Ethics in servicing
Being locked into closed software
Probably no longer a good idea
Regarding your February editorial, there are probably quite a few reasons why companies refuse to do
component-level repair, such as:
• Excess stock of motherboards
• No skilled workers to replace an SMD IC
• No equipment to replace SMD parts
• Captive service (they want it all to themselves)
• They would rather sell new products than spare
parts or service
I see the biggest problem as manufacturers or their
agents failing to supply repair firms (their competition)
I am writing about your response to my email, “Forced
upgrades due to incompatibility”, published in the February 2023 issue on page 12.
I commenced my interest in using VBA macros while
subscribing to “Australian PC User” and then “Australian
Personal Computer” (APC), following Helen Bradley from
one publication to the other when she moved. She may
have retired several years ago, as she ceased producing
these columns around that time.
She used to have a single-page article in each issue of
PC User, followed by APC, containing a VBA macro, or a
set of related and connected VBA macros, for one of the
Microsoft programs (Excel, Word or PowerPoint) showing how to use the newly included function(s) provided
for VBA macro routines; primarily for Excel, but with the
occasional one for Word and PowerPoint.
I am now a captive of the proprietary content of Microsoft Office due to its support for VBA macros, functions
and keywords, making my files incompatible with, and
hence unable to be transferred to, either LibreOffice or, if
it is still around, OpenOffice. Their macro functions and
keywords are different, and it would be a time-consuming
and difficult process to rewrite my existing macros.
So, it would seem that, at least with Microsoft Office,
I am locked in.
Paul Myers, Karabar, NSW.
Comment: we prefer to use open, cross-platform languages
for this reason (and there are many available), although
it’s hard to find a direct competitor to VBA macros in
Excel. Note that LibreOffice has limited support for executing VBA macros, but we suspect it might not be good
enough for you.
December issue enjoyed
Thanks for a fine ongoing publication. Publishing the
James Webb article (December 2022 issue; siliconchip.au/
Article/15575) was the correct decision as it was a great
read, as was the Vintage TV article in the same issue (RCA
621TS by Dr Hugo Holden), with the excellence & effort
shown in its upgrade.
I remember using 5BP1 display tubes from radar disposals with Radio, TV & Hobbies projects.
Bruce Wilson, Warriewood, NSW.
SC
12
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Subscribe to
FEBRUARY 2023
ISSN 1030-2662
02
9 771030 266001
$1150* NZ $1290
INC GST
INC GST
THE HISTORY OF
COMPUTER MEMORY
Soft Starter
Active Mains
ADVANCED
Australia’s top electronics magazine
TEST T
Silicon Chip is one of the best DIY electronics magazines in the
world. Each month is filled with a variety of projects that you can
build yourself, along with features on a wide range of topics from
in-depth electronics articles to general tech overviews.
EEZERS
Published in
Silicon Chip
If you have an active subscription you receive 10% OFF
orders from our Online Shop (siliconchip.com.au/Shop/)*
Rest of
World
New
Zealand
Australia
* does not include the cost of postage
Length
Print
Combined
Online
6 months
$65
$75
$50
1 year
$120
$140
$95
2 years
$230
$265
$185
6 months
$80
$90
1 year
$145
$165
2 years
$275
$310
6 months
$100
$110
1 year
$195
$215
2 years
$380
$415
All prices are
in Australian
dollars (AUD).
Combined
subscriptions
include both
the printed
magazine and
online access.
Try our Online Subscription – now with PDF downloads!
The History of Computer
Memory; Jan & Feb 2023
Advanced
SMD Test Tweezers;
February & March 2023
Active Mains Soft Starter;
February & March 2023
Dual-Channel Breadboard
PSU; December 2022
An online issue is perfect for those who don’t want too much clutter around the house
and is the same price worldwide. Issues can be viewed online, or downloaded as a PDF.
To start your subscription go to
siliconchip.com.au/Shop/Subscribe
Communicating
when Underwater
By Dr David Maddison
Today, we take communication in most places for granted, and for the
most part, it is possible. But underwater (and underground), things get
a lot more difficult. Still, there are ways to get a message across. This
article will concentrate on the challenges underwater; we will cover
underground communications in a follow-up article next month.
A
round cities and even in
rural areas, we can connect to
phone towers with our mobile phones,
or we can communicate via radio
directly to other radios or via repeaters (eg, CB radio). We can use satellite
phones or shortwave radios in remote
areas, including at sea.
All these methods rely on transmitting radio waves through the atmosphere, either line-of-sight to a tower,
bouncing off the ground or atmospheric
layers, line-of-sight to a satellite overhead, or directly from transmitter to
receiver. Transmitting through water
or underground is much more difficult for the reasons explained below.
Communicating through
liquid or solid matter
Why would you want to communicate underwater or underground?
Think of vehicles like submarines or
underwater drones, or when people are
in a cave or mine, or buried in snow.
14
Silicon Chip
Common radio frequencies used
for general above-ground communications are in the medium frequency
(MF), high frequency (HF), very high
frequency (VHF), ultra high frequency
(UHF) and super high frequency (SHF)
bands, from about 300kHz to 30GHz
– see Table 1. These frequencies generally don’t penetrate very far into the
ground or saltwater.
Useful radio penetration into the
ground or saltwater is generally only
possible with wavelengths in the
extremely low frequency (ELF) to very
low frequencies (VLF) bands, from 3Hz
to 30kHz. An unfortunate characteristic of these frequencies is that they
have enormously long wavelengths,
and consequently, vast antennas are
required.
However, some tricks can be used
to lengthen antennas electrically.
Also, receiving antennas don’t have
to be as long as transmitting antennas; loop antennas can also be used for
Australia's electronics magazine
reception. Apart from the large antennas needed, the bandwidth and hence
data transmission rate at those low frequencies is so low that voice cannot be
transmitted, only simple codes.
See Figs.1-3 to get an idea of the
vast inductors and coils used for VLF
transmissions.
Why do longer radio wavelengths
have greater penetrating power?
Conductive materials usually block
electromagnetic waves; hence, the
use of metals to shield electronics
from interference or shielding braids
in coaxial cables. Conductors mostly
block radio waves because they contain free electrons, which are caused to
oscillate by the radio wave and reflect
or absorb energy in doing so.
The lower the frequency, the less
energy is absorbed because there is
less coupling of the wave with the electrons. Note also that extremely thin
layers of metal do allow the transmission of some electromagnetic waves.
siliconchip.com.au
Figs.1-3: examples of 1960s RF variometers (variable inductors) and RF coils in a “helix house” as part of the final drive
for a US Navy VLF antenna for submarine communications. These are at the US Naval Communications Station in
Balboa, Panama and were made by Continental Electronics. Source: www.navy-radio.com/xmtr-vlf.htm
Also, alternating currents mostly
travel in the outside surface of conductors, to the ‘skin depth’, which
becomes lesser as the frequency
increases. The skin depth is greater
in more poorly conducting materials.
Seawater is also electrically conducting, although not nearly as conductive as metals. Seawater is an
electrolyte that conducts mainly
because of dissolved free mobile ions
from common salt, primarily sodium
(Na+) and chlorine (Cl−), but also others like magnesium (Mg2+), calcium
(Ca2+) etc.
These mobile ions absorb and reflect
most radio waves at frequencies except
the lowest. Freshwater is much less
conductive than seawater, making
radio penetration into freshwater
much greater than seawater. Still, submarines rarely travel in freshwater.
The electrical conductivity of seawater is typically in the range of
3-6S/m (Siemens/m), compared to the
conductivity of copper at 5.8×107S/m
and aluminium at 3.8×107S/m. So
these metals are about 10 million times
more conductive than seawater.
Nevertheless, the electrical conductivity of seawater is still a problem for
radio communications. However, for
above-ground communications, this
can be a benefit; it is possible to use
seawater as the ground plane or counterpoise of an antenna.
Some rocks have a high metal content, making them also somewhat
conductive; this is an important consideration for antenna siting.
Submarines
Submerged submarines cannot communicate at regular radio frequencies,
and can only receive radio signals at
ELF, SLF, UHF and VLF frequencies
(3Hz-30kHz; see Table 1). Because of
these low frequencies, information
transfer is extremely slow, far too
low for voice frequencies, and only
simple codes or Morse code can be
transmitted.
Only nine countries are known to
operate VLF transmitters to communicate with submarines: Australia,
Germany, India, Norway, Pakistan,
Russia, Turkey, the UK and the USA.
Table 1 – radio frequency bands per the ITU (International Telecommunication Union)
Frequency name
Abbr.
Freq. range
Wavelength
Some common uses
<3Hz
>100,000km
None known
3Hz-30Hz
100,000km10,000km
Submarine communications
Super low frequency SLF
30Hz300Hz
10,000km1,000km
Submarine communications
Ultra low frequency
ULF
300Hz3kHz
1,000km100km
Submarine communications, mine and cave
communications
Very low frequency
VLF
3kHz-30kHz 100km-10km
Submarine communications, radio navigation systems, time
signals, geophysics
Low frequency
LF
30kHz300kHz
Radio navigation, time signals, longwave AM commercial
broadcasting in Europe and Asia, RFID, amateur radio
(certain countries)
...continued overleaf
No ITU designation
Extremely low
frequency
siliconchip.com.au
ELF
10km-1km
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 15
Table 1 (continued) – radio frequency bands per the ITU (International Telecommunication Union)
Medium frequency
MF
300kHz3MHz
1,000m-100m AM commercial broadcasting, amateur radio, avalanche
beacons
High frequency
HF
3MHz30MHz
100m-10m
Shortwave & amateur radio, 27MHz CB, long-range aviation
& marine communications, radio fax, over-the-horizon radio
Very high frequency
VHF
30MHz300MHz
10m-1m
Aircraft communications, amateur radio, emergency
services, commercial FM broadcasts
Ultra high frequency UHF
300MHz3GHz
1m-10cm
TV broadcasts, microwave ovens, radars, mobile phones,
GPS, wireless LAN, Bluetooth, ZigBee, satellites, Australian
UHF CB
Super high
frequency
SHF
3GHz30GHz
10cm-1cm
Wireless LAN, radar, satellites, amateur radio
Extremely high
frequency
EHF
30GHz300GHz
1cm-1mm
Satellites, microwave links, remote sensing
300GHz3THz
1mm-0.1mm
Remote sensing, experimental uses
No ITU designation
Table 2 – radio wave penetration in water for 50dB attenuation
Frequency 10Hz (ELF)
Source: https://jcis.sbrt.org.br/jcis/article/view/362
100Hz (SLF)
1kHz (ULF)
10kHz (VLF)
1MHz (MF)
10MHz (HF)
1GHz (UHF)
Seawater 440m
140m
44m
14m
1.4m
0.44m
0.044m
Freshwater 29000m
9200m
2900m
920m
92m
29m
2.9m
Submerged submarines cannot
transmit messages because the antenna
required would be infeasibly long
and the power requirements too high.
Nevertheless, very long antennas are
trailed behind submarines when they
have to receive these signals; certain
types of loop antennas can also be
used.
Submarines can transmit and
receive at all typical frequencies if
they surface, partially surface, float an
antenna buoy to the surface or connect
to a seabed “docking station”.
However, a submarine that has surfaced or partly surfaced runs the risk of
being found, either via its radio transmissions, or radar or optical reflections from its antenna masts or buoy.
Its wake could also be detected by an
aircraft or satellite. For a table of submarine radio communications options
and the associated risks, see Fig.4.
To minimise radar reflections from
submarine periscopes and antenna
masts, radar-absorbing materials
(RAM) are applied – see our article on
Stealth Technology in the May 2020
issue (siliconchip.au/Article/14422).
Besides radio, submarines can communicate via acoustic and optical
means, which we will also cover.
descend to 600m. Escape from submarines is possible to a depth of about
200m and rescue with another submersible to about 600m.
Submarines don’t always operate
at their maximum depth, though;
they choose the depth corresponding to the thermal layer that is most
likely to prevent sonar detection for
the particular sea conditions they find
themselves in.
The ABC news article at www.abc.
net.au/news/11570886 states that the
typical operational depth of an Australian Collins-class submarine is 180m.
Radio signal penetration
Table 2 shows the depth at which
radio signals can be received through
water for an attenuation of 50dB,
which is a power reduction of 10000:1.
That doesn’t necessarily mean that
signals can’t be received deeper than
that; it depends on the original signal strength and the sensitivity of the
receiving equipment.
Sources differ on the exact penetration of these frequencies into seawater, but they broadly agree with what’s
shown in the table.
Attenuation changes with salinity
and temperature. Depending on the
radio frequency, it is likely that a submarine will have to alter its depth to
be able to receive radio signals. Fig.5
shows radio wave attenuation for
Submarine operating depths
The operating depth of submarines is said to be from the surface to
300m-450m below for modern Western nuclear submarines. Some sources
claim that Russian Yasen-M boats can
16
Silicon Chip
Fig.4: submarine RF communications options and associated risks. LDR = low
data rate, MDR = medium data rate, P/D = periscope depth, ESM electronic
support measures (intelligence gathering through passive listening). Based on:
https://man.fas.org/dod-101/navy/docs/scmp/part06.htm
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
To receive VLF signals, submarines are
typically equipped with both.
The Ambrose Channel pilot
cable (ULF)
Fig.5: radio attenuation for a range of water conductivities and frequencies.
Seawater (the most conductive) corresponds to the top two curves. Original:
from a 2012 paper by Emma O’Shaughnessy quoted at www.quora.com/Whycant-radio-waves-transmit-through-water
The Ambrose Channel is the only
entrance to the Port of New York and
New Jersey. Delays due to bad weather
were once a huge and expensive problem, so in 1919-1920, they laid a cable
on the bottom of the channel, which
carried a 500Hz, 400V AC signal that
could be detected about 1km away.
Ships carried two induction coils and
an amplifier to receive the signal.
By switching between coils, they
could determine which side was
closer. The signal was mechanically
keyed with Morse code that spelled
NAVY. Arguably, this was the first
use of what could be interpreted as
a ULF signal for underwater communications.
different frequencies and water conductivities.
has been tested, as we will investigate shortly.
The Grimeton Radio
station (VLF)
Optimal frequency in the ELF
to VLF range
Receiving electric versus
magnetic fields
As per Table 2, VLF is the highest
useful frequency range for communication with submerged submarines.
The lower the frequency, the better
the penetration into seawater. Still, as
the frequency reduces, so does the rate
at which data can be transmitted. The
complexity and cost of the transmitter
also increase dramatically as the frequency drops.
For this reason, VLF has been chosen as a happy medium for submarine
radio communications, although ELF
Radio signals have an electric field
component and a magnetic field component. An example in everyday use
is a long-wire antenna on an AM radio
vs a ferrite rod or loop antenna. The
long wire is sensitive to the electric
field, and the ferrite rod or loop to the
magnetic field.
It is much easier to build an antenna
to receive the electric field component,
but it is also much larger. Long-wire
antennas are possibly more sensitive
but also more prone to electrical noise.
Fig.6: an Alexanderson
Alternator at the Grimeton
Radio Station. Source:
https://w.wiki/6DPN
The Grimeton Radio station is a
World Heritage listed Swedish radio
station that operates at 17.2kHz and
200kW. It uses no electronics but generates a carrier wave for Morse Code
with a high-frequency alternator called
an Alexanderson alternator (see Fig.6).
It is an obsolete technology that was
even obsolete when the transmitter
was built.
It was used for transatlantic wireless
telegraphy from the 1920s to 1940s.
Later, it was used by the Swedish Navy
for submarine communication. It was
in service until 1995 but now operates
twice yearly – see siliconchip.au/link/
abik for the transmission schedule.
There is an Australian reception
report at siliconchip.au/link/abil,
meaning the signal travelled 14,000km
– almost to the other side of the
planet. For further information, see
http://dl1dbc.net/SAQ/ and https://w.
wiki/67Wd
Goliath (VLF)
The first use of VLF radio waves to
communicate with submerged submarines was by Nazi Germany in WW2.
Their Goliath transmitter could communicate with submarines anywhere
in the world to a depth of between 8m
and 26m, depending on water salinity,
temperature and the distance from the
transmitter.
It used a 1MW vacuum tube transmitter tuneable between 15kHz and
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 17
Fig.7: the Belconnen transmitter towers in 1951. Source: https://bpadula.tripod.
com/australiashortwave/id45.html
Fig.8: the Naval Communication Station Harold E. Holt, call sign NWC.
Source: https://w.wiki/6DPP
60kHz (20km to 5km wavelength) at 12
specific crystal-controlled frequencies,
plus other frequencies with reduced
power below 19kHz. The operation
modes of Goliath were:
a) Morse code, mainly at 16.55kHz,
using on-off keying
b) Hellschreiber at 30-50kHz with
AM tone pulses (see our articles on
Digital Radio Modes in April & May
2021; siliconchip.au/Series/360)
c) Low-quality voice at 45-60kHz
with very low bandwidth (see Table 3)
Modes a) and b) could use Enigma
encryption.
After the war, the transmitter system including the antennas was disassembled and taken to the then Soviet
Union in 3000 rail cars, and reassembled about 150km from Moscow. It is
still used today, operated by the Russian Navy, to transmit messages to
Russian submarines along with time
signals!
Its call sign is RJH90 and it operates between 20.5kHz and 25.5kHz
according to a specific schedule; see
https://w.wiki/6DP5
Belconnen Naval Transmitter
Station, Australia (VLF)
The Royal Australian Navy transmitter facility at Belconnen, ACT,
consisted of three 183m-tall VLF
transmitting masts 400m apart. They
were orientated east-west for maximum transmission directivity into the
Pacific and Indian Oceans – see Fig.7.
The complex was completed in 1939
and operated until 2005.
At the time of its completion, it was
the most powerful naval transmitting
station in what was then the British
Empire. It operated at 44kHz and was
used to communicate with surface
ships and submarines.
For submarine communications,
we can estimate that a 44kHz signal
would penetrate seawater to a depth of
10m for about 50dB attenuation. The
original power was 200kW but was
upgraded to 250kW after an overhaul
in 1959-1961. In conjunction with a
similar facility in Rugby in England,
communications could be made anywhere in the world.
One report from an ex-technician
states that the antenna system was “an
‘inverted L’ type with a huge capacitive
top hat” supported by three towers. He
also said that “the final ‘tank circuit’
was housed in its own building, and
fluorescent lights did not need to be
connected to power”.
The facility also contained HF transmitters that served both military and
civilian purposes. At the peak of its
operations, it had 38 HF transmitters
ranging from 10kW to 40kW and 50
antenna systems. In 1956, it broadcasted radio to the world about the
Olympic Games in Melbourne.
Naval VLF transmitter operations
were transferred to Harold E. Holt
Communications Station at North
West Cape, Western Australia, in 1995.
We don’t know how far away submarines could receive transmissions
from Belconnen when submerged.
Still, for the alternative site in Rugby
in England, the page at siliconchip.au/
link/abim indicates that submarines
could receive 16kHz signals with an
antenna depth of about 7m and a range
of about 3200km with loop antennas.
The reception range increased dramatically when not using loop antennas; presumably, long wires were used
instead.
Also see the video titled “Track 6
Belconnen Transmitting Station” at
https://youtu.be/lX39drhaI7g
Naval Communication
Station Harold E. Holt (VLF)
The Naval Communication Station Harold E. Holt (Fig.8) is based
in northwest Western Australia, was
built in 1968 and is a joint Australia/
Fig.10: a side elevation view of the VLF antenna system at Cutler, Maine shown in Fig.11.
18
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.9: the Naval Communication Station Harold E. Holt antenna system.
US facility for communicating with
submarines. It operates at 19.8kHz
and 1MW, so we can surmise a penetration depth into seawater of approximately 10m. However, due to its
high power, the actual depth may be
greater.
The antenna consists of a central 387m-tall tower surround by
six 364m-tall towers and a further
six 304m-tall towers; see Fig.9. It is
described as a ‘trideco’ antenna. The
wires from the central mast to the 12
surrounding towers create a capacitor
‘plate’, with six ‘panels’ parallel to the
ground and driven at the centre (see
Figs.10 & 11 of a similar antenna).
Rather than the central mast being
the radiating element, there are six
vertical wire “downleads” that radiate the VLF waves. There is a “counterpoise” system at ground level or
Table 3 – Goliath system voice
Frequency
-3dB bandwidth
15kHz
30Hz
20kHz
63Hz
30kHz
250Hz
60kHz
1230Hz
Source: siliconchip.au/link/abjd
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.11: the US Navy VLF antenna system at Cutler, Maine, which is very similar
to the one at Harold E. Holt. Note the vast dimensions.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 19
buried within the ground (it is not
clear which). The antenna design is
extremely efficient at 70-80% compared to other VLF antennas with efficiencies of 15-30%.
There is not a lot of information
available on this antenna and transmitter system but a very similar US Navy
system is installed at Cutler in Maine,
USA. See siliconchip.au/link/abj7
Fig.12 shows a submarine VLF
receiver from 1972, the same era as
this transmitter.
US Navy ELF program
Fig.12: the configuration of submarine VLF receiving equipment with the
AN/BRR-3 set circa 1972. It operates at 14-30kHz with a loop antenna, longwire buoy antenna or whip. Source: www.navy-radio.com/manuals/01011xx/0101_113-03.pdf
Fig.13: part of a 23km arm of the ELF antenna in the forest at Clam Lake,
Wisconsin. Source: www.navy-radio.com/commsta-elf.htm
20
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
As described earlier, transmitting at
VLF frequencies allows a submarine
to receive signals up to a submerged
depth of around 14m. The submarine
can be deeper than this, but it must
trail a buoyant antenna at the reception depth.
ELF frequencies from 3Hz to 30Hz
and SLF from 30Hz to 300Hz offer
much deeper radio penetration, allowing submarines and their antennas to
remain at normal operating depths.
Losses with SLF are very low – see
Table 4.
Experiments with ELF and SLF
started in 1962 using a leased 70km
length of HV power line in Wyoming
that was disconnected at night.
In 1963, a 176km antenna was built
from Lookout Shoals, North Carolina
to Algoma, Virginia. This was driven
with 60A at frequencies between 4Hz
and 500Hz with a radiated power of
1W. Signals were detected by the submarine USS Seawolf 3200km away, at
an unspecified depth.
In 1968, there was a proposal to
build a transmitter that operated at
40-80Hz. The SLF system was called
Project Sanguine and would have had
9700km of cable covering 58,000km2
or ~40% of the US state of Wisconsin.
One hundred underground power stations were to produce 800MW of electrical power for transmitters.
A small-scale test was performed
at Clam Lake, Wisconsin, with two
23km crossed antennas (see Fig.13).
The antenna was made of 15mm diameter aluminium cable mounted on 12m
timber utility poles. That project was
abandoned in 1973 for various reasons, but small-scale research continued. The system was designed with
extensive redundancy to withstand a
nuclear attack.
In 1981, the then President Ronald
Reagan revived the project at a much
siliconchip.com.au
smaller scale, and construction started
in 1982.
The existing 46km Clam Lake
antenna was kept, while a new 91km
antenna was built in Republic, Michigan, in the shape of the letter F with
two 23km segments and one 45km
segment, 238km away from Clam Lake
(see Fig.14). There is no significance to
the F-shape; it was due to land availability.
An important siting consideration
for the antennas was the very low conductivity bedrock in those areas. This
enabled more rock to form part of a
much larger antenna, as the current
must flow much deeper to complete
the electrical circuit. The signal generated travels in the natural waveguide
between the Earth and the bottom of
the ionosphere – see Fig.15.
The antennas were ground dipoles,
as shown in Fig.16. The antenna is fed
from the halfway point by a power
plant transmitter (P) at 300A and 76Hz
or 45Hz. The ends of the antenna are
grounded in 91m-deep boreholes. An
alternating current passes between
the grounded ends of the antenna (I)
through the bedrock and along the
above-ground wires.
The arrows point in just one direction for clarity, but the direction of the
current flow alternates. This current
creates an alternating magnetic field
(H) that radiates ELF waves, shown
in yellow. The radiation pattern is
directional, with the strongest signal
coming from the ends of the wires.
Hence, antennas must be built in at
least two or more orthogonal directions for omnidirectional use.
When combined, the effective radiated power of the two systems was
8W, from an input power of 2.6MW
– an efficiency of just 0.0003%! Due
to the low bandwidth of the system,
it took about 15 minutes to transmit a
three-letter coded message. Usually,
the message contained instructions on
where and when to surface, come close
to the surface or release an antenna
buoy to receive a more comprehensive message.
The system would constantly transmit an ‘idle’ message, indicating to a
submarine that they were still within
the receiving range.
The system became operational
in 1989 and covered about half the
world’s surface. It was decommissioned in 2004, with the US Navy stating that VLF systems had evolved to
siliconchip.com.au
Table 4 – losses & antenna efficiency for the SLF band
Frequency 45Hz
Propagation loss per 1000km 0.75dB
Loss per 1m seawater penetration 0.23dB
Relative transmitting antenna efficiency -4.4dB
76Hz
140Hz
1.2dB
2.0dB
0.27dB
0.36dB
0.0dB
2.5dB
Source: www.navy-radio.com/commsta/elf/elf-1402-81A.pdf
Fig.14: a map showing the location of the Clam Lake and Republic transmitter
antennas in red.
P
G
G
H
I
14 mi (23 km)
Australia's electronics magazine
Fig.15 (above): electric field lines
radiated from an ELF/SLF transmitter
travel in the natural waveguide
between the Earth and ionosphere. A
similar radiation pattern applies to
VLF. The deepest sub receives ELF,
another receives VLF with a buoyant
antenna, while another floats a buoy.
Fig.16 (left): a ground dipole of the
type used in Project ELF (one of the
23km segments). Source: https://w.
wiki/6DPK
March 2023 21
the point that this system was unnecessary.
In the video at https://youtu.be/
eC1cqwGkOwY, a technician who
worked on submarines comments
that the ELF/SLF receivers were synchronised with the transmitter using
caesium beam clocks. If a noisy signal were received from one direction,
the receiver delay would be adjusted
so the same signal could be picked
up, coming from the other side of the
world.
TACAMO
Fig.17: schematic view of two trailing
VLF antennas behind a Boeing E-6A,
part of the TACAMO communications
system. Source: https://nuke.fas.org/
guide/usa/c3i/e-6.htm
TACAMO (“Take Charge and Move
Out”) is a US system of communications links designed to survive a
nuclear attack, keeping in contact
with its submarine fleet if land-based
transmitters are destroyed. To establish VLF communications, long antennas are trailed behind a Boeing E-6B
Mercury aircraft (based on the Boeing
707; see Fig.17).
The E-6B has two trailing antennas,
one 8km long and the other 1.5km
long. Once deployed, the aircraft goes
into a tight banking turn. The longer
wire hangs as vertically as possible,
while the other wire trails behind the
plane, forming an L-shape.
The transmitter used is the 200kW
AN/ART-54 High-Power Transmitting
Set (HPTS) consisting of a Solid State
Power Amplifier/Coupler (SSPA/C)
OG-187/ART-54 and Dual Trailing Wire Antenna System (DTWA)
OE-456/ART-54.
For more details, see the TACAMO
comms flight manual for the E-6A at
siliconchip.au/link/abj8 (the earlier
version of this aircraft).
April 22nd, 2015, even though they
could have repurposed it for several
other uses, including by SBS, who
wanted to use it for a radio tower. See
my video of the tower titled “Woodside Omega Navigation System Tower
VLF Transmitter, Victoria, Australia”
at https://youtu.be/S_T7hd0oXUE
From Table 2, we can see that a
10kHz signal would penetrate seawater to a depth of around 14m with 50dB
of attenuation.
Australian Omega
transmitter (VLF)
Oberon submarine VLF
communications equipment
We covered the Omega navigation
system in detail in the September 2014
issue (siliconchip.au/Article/8002).
The Omega system was shut down on
September 30th, 1997. After that, the
Omega transmitter at Woodside, Victoria, was modified for reuse by the
Royal Australian Navy for submarine
communication until December 31st,
2008 (see Fig.18).
It was converted for use at 10-14kHz
to support a 100-baud, two-channel
MSK (minimum-shift keying) transmission with a 100kW antenna input
power and a radiated power of 36.5kW.
Its designation was VL3DEF.
Sadly, the tower was demolished on
Oberon-class submarines are now
obsolete; they were designed in Britain, built between 1957 and 1978 and
served five countries, including Australia. The last Oberons in use were
decommissioned in 2000. While it’s
hard to find information about VLF
and other communications for submarines presently in use, there are details
on the obsolete Oberon communication schemes.
Fig.19 shows their various antenna
options:
ALK a VLF aerial in a recoverable
buoy
ALM an omnidirectional VLF aerial
comprising a series of loops in the fin
22
Silicon Chip
Russian Zeus ELF/SLF
transmitter
The Russian Navy has an ELF/SLF
transmitter called ZEVS (Zeus) on
the Kola Peninsula, east of Finland.
It was first noticed in the West in the
1990s and usually operates at 82Hz
with MSK modulation, although it is
thought to be capable of transmitting
from 20Hz to 250Hz.
It is believed to have two ground
dipole antennas of 60km, driven at
200A to 300A. Apart from military
purposes, it is also used for geophysical research.
Australia's electronics magazine
Fig.18: the former 432m-tall Omega
Tower Woodside, a frame grab from
the video at https://youtu.be/S_
T7hd0oXUE Note the concrete helix
building to the right.
ALN a telescopic HF/UHF mast
ALW a buoyant, disposable VLF
wire aerial
AMK a UHF/IFF (IFF = identification, friend or foe) combined antenna
associated with the ECM (electronic
countermeasures) mast
AWJ an emergency whip aerial for
use on the surface only
Fig.20 shows the VLF receiver
used on these boats. They operated at
14-22.5kHz with 150Hz bandwidth
and were only suitable for telegraphy
reception, not voice or transmission.
VLF data rate
There is not much published information on data rates for VLF comms.
Still, Continental Electronics Corporation (https://contelec.com/case-
history-lfvlf), a major manufacturer
of naval VLF equipment, states on its
website that:
Very Low Frequency (VLF) communications transmitters use digital
signals to communicate with submerged submarines on at frequencies
of 3-30 kHz. The Navy shore VLF/LF
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.19: antenna options for the Oberon class submarine, once used by Australia.
The original is from a manual published by San Francisco Maritime National
Park Association (https://maritime.org/doc/oberon/operations/index.php).
transmitter facilities transmit a 50
baud submarine command and control broadcast which is the backbone
of the submarine broadcast system.
We assume this is with optimal
frequency and conditions. One baud
is about one bit per second, so this
is 6.25 bytes per second; the actual
rate will be less due to parity bits etc.
That works out to about 300 characters per minute.
The average word length is about
five characters, so about 60 words per
minute can be transmitted under optimal conditions (this paragraph would
take ~30s). That rate could be doubled
or even tripled with data compression.
Continental Electronics also made
equipment for the Harold E. Holt VLF
transmitter mentioned above.
receive VLF comms while the submarine stays more deeply submerged.
A submarine can still remain fully
submerged for higher frequencies but
deploy a buoy with the appropriate
antennas. Alternatively, the boat can
surface and risk being detected, as
shown in Fig.4.
Figs.21 & 22 show a buoy from
GABLER Maschinenbau GmbH that
can be deployed from a submarine via
a reel mechanism, using 8mm-thick
buoyant wire that is up to 6km long.
The buoy has various sensors, antennas and a camera. Its buoyancy can be
controlled so the antenna can remain
Fig.20: a CFA receiver, type 5820AP 164474, as used on Oberon-class
submarines. Source: http://jproc.ca/
rrp/rrp2/oberon_cfa.pdf
just submerged for VLF reception.
A 30m antenna rod for HF reception
is at the end of the cable, just before
the buoy. The system allows for the
reception of VLF signals (7-30kHz),
the reception and transmission of satellite communications when the buoy
is on the surface, and the reception of
HF signals at the surface.
Regarding satellite communications, it can receive and transmit to
Iridium, NEXT and other systems, and
it can receive GPS, Galileo, GLONASS and BeiDou navigation signals.
Unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) can
also be controlled from the buoy.
Buoyant antenna systems
Ideally, a submarine should not
have to surface to receive or send
signals. As already discussed, a submarine can deploy a wire antenna to
receive VLF. This antenna floats to
a shallow enough depth that it can
Fig.21: the GABLER reel mechanism
and buoy for trailing submarine
antenna system. Source: www.
gabler-naval.com/wp-content/
uploads/2021/05/GABLER-Naval_
BWA_2021-05_EN.pdf
Fig.22: components of the GABLER digital buoyant wire antenna system:
1) Submersible winch. 2) Antenna tow cable with VLF antenna 3) Towed
Digital Antenna and Satcom Controller (TDASC), incorporating HF antenna.
4) Inboard control and interface unit. Source: same as Fig.21.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 23
Underwater acoustic
communications
Underwater communications can
also be acoustic. The earliest example
of this was with bells, but today, ultrasonic transducers are used.
There are many difficulties with
underwater acoustic comms, such
as multipath propagation, strong signal attenuation, environmental noise
and variation in acoustic properties of
water due to temperature and salinity layers.
Many modulation modes have been
developed for underwater acoustic
comms, such as frequency-shift keying (FSK), phase-shift keying (PSK),
frequency-hopping spread spectrum
(FHSS), direct-sequence spread spectrum (DSSS), frequency and pulse-
position modulation (FPPM and
PPM), multiple frequency-shift keying (MFSK) and orthogonal frequency-
division multiplexing (OFDM).
Acoustic signals are only transmitted from a submarine when stealth is
not a concern, as submarine or shipbased sonar systems can determine the
origin of such signals.
“Gertrude” underwater
acoustic telephone
During WW2, the USA developed
an underwater telephone called the
AN/BQC-1 (see Fig.23) and variants,
nicknamed Gertrude. It used SSB (single side-band) acoustic communications at 8.3-11.1kHz or a CW signal
at 24.26kHz.
Voice communications were possible to about 450m, but calls could be
heard at about 1.8-4.5km distance. It
was used to communicate with other
Fig.23: the “Gertrude” underwater
telephone from WW2.
24
Silicon Chip
submarines and surface vessels. Some
versions of this device are still used
today, but for stealth reasons, modern
submarines try to avoid using them.
JANUS (acoustic)
JANUS is an open-access NATO
standard for underwater acoustic communications for military and civilian
use (see www.januswiki.com/tiki-
index.php). It is a standard that serves
a similar purpose as IEEE 802.11 for
WiFi but for underwater acoustic use,
allowing devices from different manufacturers to interoperate.
Devices announce themselves at a
shared frequency of 11.5kHz and then
can negotiate a different frequency or
transmission protocol. The system has
been tested at distances up to 28km.
The present JANUS standard frequency is defined by STANAG 4748
and uses 9.44-13.6kHz.
The present frequency band for military underwater telephony (UWT) is
8087-11087Hz (STANAG 1074/1475),
which overlaps somewhat with
JANUS. There is a proposal to reserve
4375-7625Hz for military use and
24.75-31.25kHz for civilian purposes.
UT3000 (acoustic)
The ELAC UT3000 2G (see Fig.24)
combines analog and digital underwater communications into one device
and is compatible with STANAG,
JANUS and other standards. It can
deliver up to 1400W of acoustic transmission power.
It performs functions such as telephony, telegraphy, digital data transmission and reception, noise measurement and distance measurement. It
also has an emergency beacon mode
and operates from 1kHz to 60kHz.
CUUUWi (radio/acoustic)
CUUUWi (‘cooee’) is a communications gateway between underwater
and above-water mobile phone and
satellite phone users for voice and
text – sees Fig.25-27. It was developed
under an Australian government grant
by L3Harris Technologies.
The system is designed to find (from
distress signals) and then communicate with stricken submarines, or provide encrypted communications with
submarines (or other underwater platforms) at speed and depth.
A gateway surface vehicle (or fleet),
such as an unmanned surface vessel
(USV), is required to receive radio
communications from surface vessels or satellites and convert them to
acoustic communications for underwater reception. A range of up to
10km (20km in good conditions) is
possible.
The system can also be used for subsea platforms, including autonomous
underwater vehicles (AUVs), seabed
sensors, submarines, ships and divers.
The system is compatible with various
NATO standards, including JANUS.
It can detect standard 8.8kHz underwater beacons and 37kHz emergency
locator pulses, as commonly fitted to
submarines, and will soon be on aircraft ‘black boxes’ and maritime voyage recorders.
Surface modes include satellite
communications, 4G/3G/GSM and
VHF. Underwater modes include
underwater telephone (UT3000), HAIL
(Hydro Acoustic Information Link)
Fig.24: the ELAC Sonar UT3000 2G acoustic
underwater communications device. Source:
www.researchgate.net/figure/UT3000digital-underwater-communication-system_
fig2_281904054
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
IridiumSATCOM
Voice/SMS +
CUUUWi
Command &
Control
IridiumSATCOM
Surface Vessel
Voice/SMS +
CUUUWi
Command &
Control
Shore Operations
Wi-Fi (<50M)
CUUUWi
Gateway
500Kb/s
(<100M)
Rich Data
Fig.26: the
GPM300 MASQ
acoustic modem, part
of the CUUUWi system.
CUUUWi
Gateway
Voice/SMS (<10km)
AUV
APFA ultrasonic
modem supporting
rapid data channel
CCSM
● HAIL
● UT3000 & MASQ
Fig.25: the CUUUWi system with communications between satellites, surface
vessels, a submarine and an AUV (autonomous underwater vehicle). Source:
www.l3harris.com/sites/default/files/2020-09/ims-maritime-datasheetCUUUWi_0.pdf
and MASQ (Multichannel Acoustic
Signalling Quality of service).
Deep Siren (radio/acoustic)
Raytheon, Ultra Electronics Maritime Systems and RRK Technologies
Ltd developed Deep Siren Tactical
Paging (See siliconchip.au/link/abjc)
for the US Navy. It uses disposable
buoys deployed from a submarine to
transfer messages from Iridium satellites to the submarine via an acoustic data link.
The range of the system is 50 nautical miles (92.5km) or more from the
buoy to the submarine, and the submarine can operate at normal speed.
In contrast, a sub has to run at reduced
speed when towing antennas, such as
those on a floating buoy or VLF cable.
The buoy can be deployed from a surface ship, aircraft or from a submarine’s garbage chute(!).
System testing started in 2008 and it
was demonstrated in 2011. Its current
operational status is unknown.
TARF (acoustic/radar)
Translational Acoustic-RF Communication is an experimental system developed by the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology (MIT). Sound
waves from an underwater source
cause vibrations on the surface that
can be picked up via a sensitive radar
operating in the 300GHz range. See
the video titled “Getting submarines
talking to airplanes, finally” at https://
youtu.be/csYtAzDBk00
siliconchip.com.au
Range limits of underwater
acoustic communications
Nature may have the answer to
this. It is said that humpback whales
communicate acoustically and can be
heard by another up to 6400km away.
Underwater Optical
Communications (UWOC)
There were hopes in the 1980s that
airborne or spaceborne lasers could
be used to communicate with submarines. With the SLCSAT (Submarine
Laser Communication Satellite) and
similar proposals, the idea was that a
laser beam would be directed toward
the ocean in the approximate submarine area and a communications channel would be established.
Blue lasers for such a system were
developed by Northrop Corp, and
a highly sensitive laser detector by
Fig.27: an 8.8kHz emergency
location pinger with a battery
lasting 300 days. These can be
picked up by the CUUUWi system
and would help locate aircraft black
boxes, submarines in peril etc.
Lockheed Corp. As far as we know,
this system was never put into service.
From UWOC in use today and reported
below, it appears that underwater optical links in seawater can only work
over a few tens of metres.
The attenuation and scattering of
light in seawater are just too great.
However, an optical link could presumably be established between a buoy
on the ocean surface and an aircraft.
Blue-green lasers have been developed for naval use that can transmit
data at 90Mb/s over water for up to
10km, but when used underwater,
the data rate drops to 7-10Mb/s over
10-20m (as described at siliconchip.
au/link/abin).
Aqua-Fi (optical)
Basem Shihada et al. from the King
Abdullah University of Science and
Relevant videos and links
● VLF signals that individuals have received: www.sigidwiki.com/wiki/
Category:VLF
● 1972 US Navy manuals for VLF communications: www.navy-radio.com/
manuals/shore-vlf.htm
● An experimental, compact piezoelectric VLF antenna: siliconchip.au/link/
abit and www.nature.com/articles/s41598-020-73973-6
● The companion site for the Australian VLF transmitter at Belconnen, “16
kHz VLF, Rugby, England”: https://youtu.be/Unlg2gY2Zrs
● On the Goliath transmitter, “The Radio Network that Communicated with
Nazi Subs”: https://youtu.be/OSNCvJN5Xoo
● “Project E.L.F. – The history of communicating with submarines
underwater - #HamRadioQA”: https://youtu.be/eC1cqwGkOwY
● “Reception of signals from submarines on VLF”: https://youtu.be/
UYaK3tWXbn0
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 25
Technology in Saudi Arabia developed
an underwater Internet access architecture that used a Raspberry Pi computer and off-the-shelf green LEDs or
520nm lasers to transmit data. They
obtained a maximum data transfer rate
of 2.11MB/s.
They did not specify the communications distance, but diagrams in the
PDF at siliconchip.au/link/abio suggest up to 10m for LEDs or 20m for
lasers. However, the picture of the lab
demonstration shows a distance closer
to two metres.
Using online SDR radios to listen to VLF signals
You can use a computer sound card or audio input to receive VLF signals
with a PC, antenna and software only. There are many articles and videos on
how to do this. For example, see:
www.prinz.nl/SAQ.html | siliconchip.au/link/abj9 | www.vlf.it
siliconchip.au/link/abja | siliconchip.au/link/abjb
There is an experimental online VLF-HF SDR receiver (EA3HRU) at http://
sdrbcn.duckdns.org:8073/ in Pallejà, Barcelona, Spain. Select VLF mode in
the menu.
Blue laser diodes
Reported in Nature Portfolio (www.
nature.com/articles/srep40480), a
450nm blue GaN laser diode modulated by quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) orthogonal frequency
division multiplexing (OFDM) can
transmit data through seawater at a
rate of 7.2GB/s over 6.8m or 4.0GB/s
over 10.2m.
Underwater data nodes
(optical or acoustic)
Underwater data nodes could be
established for submarines or AUVs
so that they can establish a high-
bandwidth connection with their
command centre without surfacing
(see Fig.28). This would allow them to
receive information much faster than
VLF or ELF radio, and transmit it too,
without having to release a floating
antenna or buoy.
A faster data channel could be established than with satellites, so there
would be less exposure time for the
antenna buoy or periscope. This would
also provide an alternative means of
communication if satellites and landbased transmitters are destroyed.
Fig.28: an underwater
communication range of 1020m is within the capability of a
blue-green laser. Source: www.
mobilityengineeringtech.com/
component/content/24599
26
Silicon Chip
A screen grab from the online SDR radio EA3HRU in VLF mode.
The idea is that an underwater vehicle would manoeuvre close to the communication node on the seabed and
establish a comms channel by optical
or acoustic means.
China’s laser sub-hunting
system (optical)
It is not hard to imagine that the following laser system built to hunt for
submarines could also be used to communicate with them if the laser system
was modulated with data.
According to ABC News (www.abc.
net.au/news/11570886), China has
developed a blue-green laser system
for shining light from aircraft into the
ocean and looking for a reflection indicating the presence of a submarine.
The laser is beamed from an aircraft at
an altitude of 1.6-3.2km and will find
a submarine as deep as 160m.
The article notes that a Collins-class
submarine has a typical operational
depth of 180m. The objective is to
build a satellite that can find subs as
deep as 500m.
This system is similar in principle to
the Australian-developed LADS (Laser
Airborne Depth Sounder) for seafloor
mapping, which could be adapted for
submarine communication. However,
as noted above, optical communications underwater are of limited range.
See our previous article on sonar in
Australia's electronics magazine
the June 2019 issue (siliconchip.au/
Article/11664).
LUMA
LUMA X is an underwater optical
modem (www.hydromea.com) that
can transfer data at up to 10Mbit/s
over 50m, enough for HD video –
see Fig.29. It is suitable for use with
autonomous underwater vehicles
(AUVs) and remotely operated vehicles (ROVs).
Next month
Underground communications pose
some similar challenges to underwater communications. There are quite
a few different aspects to communication underground, so we’ll cover
them in a separate article in next
SC
month’s issue.
Fig.29: the Luma underwater
optical modem. Source: https://files.
hydromea.com/luma/Hydromea_
LUMA_X_datasheet.pdf
siliconchip.com.au
aarkcerh
M
M
Build It Yourself Electronics Centres®
SAVE $370
999
$
r space.
Upgrade your make st.
K 8604
arch 31
Sale prices must end M
Everything a
maker space
needs in one
compact unit!
SAVE $26
99
$
T 2040
y for
Top bu nts &
de
the stu ers!
a
m k
Amazing
value under
$100
Micron®
68W Compact
Soldering Station
This latest design benchtop soldering iron offers convenience and
plenty of power for the enthusiast. Offers precise dial temperature
control with temperature lock. In-built sleeper stand shuts down
the unit when not in use saving on power costs. Includes a fine
1.2mm chisel tip, solder reel holder and tip sponge.
VALUE!
99
$
Q 1073A
Top Spec True RMS DMM
Our first multimeter with wireless
USB charging in-built! Includes top
spec features such as illuminated
sockets, LED torch, desk stand, True
RMS, non contact voltage detection,
frequency meter and relative mode.
X 3270 Warm White
X 3271 Natural White
Creality® CP-01
3D Printer / CNC Router / Laser Engraver
The ultimate do-it-all maker machine for the workbench. Create amazing
prototypes and one off designs with this all in one mini home factory.
Includes three interchangeable machine heads for cutting, etching and printing each
with excellent accuracy. Easily assembled from flat-pack in just a few minutes. Router
& engraver suitable for plastics, wood, PCBs, laminates etc.
Stay
charged up
on the road!
SAVE 33%
20ea
$
NEW!
Modular Aluminium LED Strips
Perfect for lighting inside cabinets, under shelves, wardrobes etc.
Utilises high efficiency SMD LEDs - 4W per strip. Use at home or
in cars, caravans & 4WDs. 39Wx8Hx300Lmm. Join up to 5 strips
together using joiners. 12V input, 500mA per strip.
319
$
M 8025 600W 24V
Accessories:
X 3273 Straight joiner $3.50
X 3274 90° joiner $3.50
X 3277 Motion switch $16.50
X 3275 Touch dimmer $6.95
M 8027 1500W 24V
M 8066 2000W 12V
Ultra compact 2 x 2.4A USB
charger, fits in just about any car
accessory socket!
X 2920
15W LED Vehicle Light
Pure Sine
Wave
Housed in a rugged aluminium extrusion,
this new range delivers robust reliability
and unwavering performance - even
under severe operating conditions. For
peace of mind all models have been
certified to Australian Standard AS/NZS
4763.2011. Ideal for tricky loads, such as
laptops, TVs & game consoles. Perfect for
4WDs, campers, caravans & trade vans.
29.95
$
Rugged aluminium casing with ultra-bright 15W light output for under wheel arches on 4WDs, exterior lighting on
campers & caravans etc. IP68 rated. 12-24V DC input.
Charges
a laptop, a
phone & tablet
at the same
time!
Ultimate in portable power.
625
830
Bargain car charger!
NEW!
NEW BlackMax
Power Inverters
NEW 24V VERSIONS,
PLUS A 2000W 12V
MODEL.
$
$
M 8625A
11.95
$
SAVE $44
85
$
D 2323
or 2 for $120
Bench Mount USB PD Charger
A 96W USB type C power delivery charger, plus dual QC 3.0
USB charging in the one compact near flush mount unit.
Requires 60mmØ hole. Includes power supply.
Order online at altronics.com.au | Sale pricing ends March 31st
Tool up your work space
for less.
SAVE $100
Features 3
preset channels
for quick temp
selection.
T 2460A
339
$
Not just for
desoldering works great as a
regular hot air gun!
TOP VALUE! To buy these separately
would normally cost $154!
T 1289
SAVE $40
119
$
SAVE 22%
SMD Hot Air
Re-Work
Desoldering Gun
70
$
T 2163
Micron® Touchscreen Soldering Station
Small investment - big time value! This kit is jam packed with tools to
get started in electronics. Includes a quality soldering iron, multimeter,
solder sucker, wire stripper, cutters, pliers and more! Ideal for
beginners, enthusiasts or occasional builders.
A sturdy 100W benchtop soldering station featuring an all aluminium case
and 2.8” touchscreen for quick temperature and preset selection. 100500°C temp range with slimline handle featuring burn resistant cable.
19999
Count
True RMS
Multimeter
SAVE $22
88
$
1500W
Heat Gun
T 2098
300W Adjustable Solder Pot
Tin multiple stranded hookup wires or remove multipin connectors from boards quickly and easily. Takes
up to 1350g of solder. Stable temperature control:
200-480°C. Suitable for lead free and leaded work.
500g leaded solder bar $43.65 (T 1139A). 300W.
Provides 300W of hot air for quick and
easy desolder and re-work of surface
mount boards. 200-500°C adjustable.
Includes desk stand - plus narrow, medium
and wide nozzles for different tasks.
Handy 20pc Electronics Building Starter Set.
Perfect for
heatshrink - shrinks
evenly without
burning. Shifts
paint, solvents from
surfaces, makes
plastics malleable,
etc. 450L/min
airflow.
SAVE 20%
55
$
T 2110
19999
COUNT
LCD!
Extended resolution to 4 digits!
Offers everything
the serious
enthusiast could
need with auto
ranging, min/
max/rel modes,
frequency, duty
cycle and non
contact voltage
detection.
Accurate
Digital
Vernier
Calipers
Precision measuring
with ease! 150mm
length, suitable for
measuring internal, external and
depth dimensions.
0.01mm, 0.0005”
and 1/128th”
SAVE 24%
display.
Q 1135
SAVE $19
70
$
T 2247A
44
$
SAVE 27%
SAVE $40
29
$
119
$
T 2186A
T 1295A
SAVE 24%
120mm
long life
high flow
fan
SAVE 12%
40
$
T 1461
Ultimate Flexible Helping Hands
The ultimate in soldering helper hands! Includes magnifier to assist with those fiddly jobs. Arm length ≈30cm.
2 In 1
Torch &
Lantern
Super bright
3W LED
with pop up
lantern.
X 0229
15
$
T 1522
Desktop Fume Extractor
101 Piece Ratchet Driver Kit
A must have for any soldering or 3D printing work
space. Whisks away fumes and filters the air through
active carbon filter pads (3 included). 115CFM air
flow with low noise ball bearing fan.
Features 95 security, philips, pozi and slotted
bits made from tough S2 alloy. Includes ratchet
handle with comfy rubber grip. See web for full
contents list.
T 2282
SAVE
28%
30
$
9
$ .95
SAVE
24%
This nifty 12 in 1 pocket saviour
helps you fix life’s little problems.
Strips cable of insulation at the flick of
the wrist. Our best selling cable stripper
of all time!
10
Includes storage case.
$
SAVE 20%
T 2329
16.95
$
The Pocket Hero is here!
Super Fast Wire Stripper
Tungsten Carbide PCB Drill Set
A set of 10 PCB drill bits in a handy plastic carry case.
Sizes: 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2mm.
T 4018
15.95
$
Magnetic Bowl
A handy 4” stainless steel
bowl with magnetic base to
keep screws from straying.
T 2191A
Mini Ratchet Driver
Includes 7 driver bits stored
inside the handle.
Your one-stop electronics shop since 1976. | Order online at altronics.com.au
Tinker, design & invent.
Raspberry Pi® Pico Development Board
The new Pi Pico is a tiny, fast and versatile board using RP2040 - a
brand new microcontroller and combined with PiicoDev boards below
it’s a powerful board to base your projects in. Programmable in C and
MicroPython with a huge development community on the internet so you
can find help, get project ideas and code!
Z 6421
8
$ .95
The STEM maker platform designed & developed in Australia.
PiicoDev hardware has been designed from the
ground-up with rapid prototyping and maker
education in mind. Featuring a unified MicroPython
library suitable for Raspberry Pi, Pico and Microbit.
Simple to connect modules with consistent sizing
for easy stacking and experimenting. The PiicoDev
system provides lots of creative freedom for hands
on electronics building.
Designed and developed by Core Electronics
in Newcastle, NSW.
165pc Sensor
Parts Pack
Model
Z 6419
Z 6590
Z 6591
Z 6580
Z 6581
Z 6582
Z 6583
Z 6584
Z 6585
Z 6596
Z 6597
Type
Adapter Board for Raspberry Pi Pico
Adapter Board for BBC micro:bit
Adapter Board for Raspberry Pi GPIO
TMP117 Precision Temperature Sensor
BME280 Atmospheric Sensor
VEM6030 Ambient Light Sensor
VL53L1X Distance Sensor
MPU6050 Motion Sensor
MS5637 Pressure Sensor
PiicoDev Cable 100mm
PiicoDev Cable 200mm
Z 6393
SAVE $36
28
SAVE 20%
10
$
High Torque MG995 Metal
Gear Servo
Value
packed!
Z 6315
A high speed metal geared servo with
12kg/cm torque. Weighs 55 grams. 120
degree rotation (±60°)
Z 6392
Z 6444
MG90S Micro Metal Servo
Lightweight SG90 Servo
A great micro servo for lightweight
robotics applications. 180 degree
rotation (±90°). 3.5-6V operation.
A high speed metal geared servo with
2kg/cm torque. Weighs 14.5 grams.
180 degree rotation (±90°).
S 4725 2000mAh
SAVE 15%
NEW!
19
$
24.95
$
NEW!
SAVE $51
K 9675
Provides a backlit 16x2 LCD for simple readouts,
plus room to customise the front panel with buttons
etc. UNO (sold separately) fits behind the screen and
provides room for add-on shields.
5” Raspberry Pi®
Touchscreen
21.95
$
69
$
Z 6513
Great for integrated projects, game consoles,
mini PCs etc. Works with raspbian & ubuntu.
HDMI connection. 800x480 resolution
W 0884A
S 4724 1100mAh
Mini Li-Po 3.7V Battery Packs
Great for compact portable projects requiring
rechargeable power. S 4724: 51 x 34 x 6mm
S 4725: 56 x 56 x 8mm
Heatshrink Jumbo Value Pack
Stock up your work bench with 171pcs of 75mm &
45mm lengths in a range of colours & sizes (3.2 to
12.7mm). 2:1 shrink ratio.
DC-DC Boost
Module
4
$ ea
SAVE
22%
Ribbon Jumper Leads
Keeps your cables neater, peel off as
many as your need for prototyping.
P 1021 Pin to Socket
P 1022 Pin to Pin
P 1023 Socket to Socket
4 for
$
SAVE 25%
SAVE 22%
22
SAVE 19%
16
MegaStand 16x2 LCD
For Arduino UNO
$
Available
now!
$
89
$
Includes a huge selection
of sensor boards, LEDs,
pots, jumper wires, a
breadboard, LCD screen
and much
more! A handy
storage case
keeps it neat
when you’re
finished building.
Includes links to
projects and example code.
RRP
$7.95
$5.80
$4.60
$9.95
$13.50
$4.60
$19.00
$9.25
$8.60
$1.25
$1.50
Allows a 3-34V
DC input to be boosted
up between 4-35VDC.
2A rated. Input/output
voltage display.
SAVE 24%
13
$
SAVE 20%
Z 6339
SAVE 20%
20
$
Z 6426
Z 6338
DC-DC Converter Module
Allows a low input voltage (3.5-35V)
to be increased to a higher output
(5-25V). Easy to inline connection.
2A continuous.
DC-DC Buck Module
Z 6334
7
$ .95
Generate a lower voltage
output from a higher supply.
3-40V DC in, 1.5-35V DC out.
3A max.
19
$
CAN-BUS Arduino Shield
Allows you to interface Arduino’s with CANBUS control systems found in automotive
electronics. Use an Arduino to build your own
vehicle monitors.
Order online at altronics.com.au | Sale pricing ends March 31st
Big savings on audio visual.
Opus One® 140W
Soundbar Wireless Subwoofer
C 9021A
SAVE $40
Our new premium finish soundbar offers rich, clear sound from
it’s 6 high performance speaker drivers, plus a 8” subwoofer
which can be placed anywhere in your lounge room thanks to
wireless connectivity. Offers bluetooth audio streaming from
your favourite devices, plus S/PDIF digital audio input for
connection to your TV (cable included).
99
$
Soundbar: 97 x 8 x 7.5cm,
Subwoofer: 30 x 25 x 30cm
$120
269 SAVE
$
C 5059
Super Quiet Noise Cancelling
Bluetooth® Headphones
FANTASTIC
VALUE AT $99!
Why pay
$300 or more?
No outside interference with world class noise reduction technology. Designed & engineered in Silicon Valley, USA. • Block out distractions while you work • Superb active noise cancelling • Bluetooth
wireless • 12hrs of listening time. • USB rechargeable (includes cable)
• Carry pouch. Amazing sound. You be the judge - try a pair in store!
A 4201
SAVE $40
199
$
Boost your TV
signal!
Bluetooth®
2x50W Amplifier
Stream audio directly from
your device to your speakers in
the study or entertaining area.
3.5mm and RCA inputs. Class
D design. Internal headphone
amplifier. Includes power
supply, banana speaker plugs &
3.5mm to RCA cable.
99
Handy kit to get started in
online content creation!
SAVE $70
D 0990
169
$
All-In-One Mini Audio Studio For Creators
19
$
Shop with us on
uts
Add 3 HDMI inp
to your telly.
SAVE 16%
45
$
Sale Ends March 31st 2023
Phone: 1300 797 007 Fax: 1300 789 777
Mail Orders: mailorder<at>altronics.com.au
Comfy Monitor Headphones
Maono AH-MH601. Just the shot for creative
production, podcasting, video editing and mixing.
Deep bass with crisp treble and full midtones.
Detachable lead, 3.5mm or 6.35mm connection.
Broken remote?
No problem!
With
muting
button
SAVE 20%
A 3087C
59
$
D 0985
3 Way 4K UHD HDMI Switch
USB Conference Mic
Switch between 3 HDMI sources such as
game consoles, Chromecast, media centres etc. Ultra HD 4K ready.
Top quality audio for meetings. USB C.
Diecast case with rubber feet for excellent noise isolation. 2m cable.
Dog ate your
remote? This handy
replacement features
IR learning plus preprogrammed codes
for 100’s of popular
equipment brands.
A 1012A
SAVE 20%
27
$
ebay.com.au/str/altronicsaustralia
Western Australia
Build It Yourself Electronics Centres
C 9014C
The MaonoCaster Lite provides everything you need to get started in podcasting, live streaming, YouTube & Twitch. Get top quality audio from the included
XLR cardioid pick up condenser mic, control all your device levels, effects and
music using the mixer buttons. Includes mic, mixer console, USB C cable,
tripod, windsock, 3 x TRRS jack cables and monitor earphones.
Desk mount microphone arm to suit C 0506 $35.95.
Handy
problem
solver!
Simple to install in-line
booster for delivering added
gain to your existing antenna.
L 2047
Great for fixing choppy
NEW!
reception issues. USB
powered.
.95
SAVE
$16
$
» Perth: 174 Roe St
» Joondalup: 2/182 Winton Rd
» Balcatta: 7/58 Erindale Rd
» Cannington: 5/1326 Albany Hwy
» Midland: 1/212 Gt Eastern Hwy
» Myaree: 5A/116 N Lake Rd
Victoria
08 9428 2188
08 9428 2166
08 9428 2167
08 9428 2168
08 9428 2169
08 9428 2170
» Springvale: 891 Princes Hwy
» Airport West: 5 Dromana Ave
03 9549 2188
03 9549 2121
New South Wales
» Auburn: 15 Short St
02 8748 5388
Queensland
» Virginia: 1870 Sandgate Rd
07 3441 2810
South Australia
» Prospect: 316 Main Nth Rd
08 8164 3466
Please Note: Resellers have to pay the cost of freight & insurance. Therefore the range of stocked products & prices charged by individual resellers may vary from our catalogue.
© Altronics 2023. E&OE. Prices stated herein are only valid until date shown or until stocks run out. Prices include GST and exclude freight and insurance. See latest catalogue for freight rates.
*All smartphone devices pictured in this catalogue are for illustration purposes only. Not included with product.
B 0003
Find a local reseller at: altronics.com.au/storelocations/dealers/
Digital Volume Control
POTENTIOMETER
By Phil Prosser
We got tired of volume control potentiometers going scratchy after just a few
years and the very poor balance at low volumes. This drop-in replacement
uses a digital IC, so it tracks exceptionally well and will give top performance
for decades. The SMD version fits in the space occupied by most regular pots,
while the through-hole version does a similar job but is a bit easier to build.
W
e have had to replace volume
controls in our prized equipment too often due to them going
‘noisy’. In the September 2022 issue,
a reader wrote in with that exact same
problem; we know it affects many
people.
In one spectacular failure, a ground
tab on the volume pot for my work
stereo failed, resulting in that channel running flat-out all night, to greet
co-workers at full blast the next morning!
The gauntlet was thrown down
recently when building a remote
volume control. The motorised pot
literally failed out of the box, the
crimped-on tabs being loose (we know
others have experienced this too).
There must be a better solution!
Why aren’t there pot-sized volume
digital controls that use some of the
excellent electronic volume control
ICs with a digital rotary encoder? Well,
now there are!
The original concept for this project was a straight-out replacement for
a volume pot. Our illustrious Editor
asked the innocent question: “If you
have a PIC in there to control the volume IC, why not have IR remote control as well?”. As it turned out, that
was not too difficult to provide.
The resulting SMD design is a very
modest size at just 25mm wide by
36mm deep. It’s just a little larger than
a typical dual-gang log pot, as shown
in the photos.
While this small size is clearly a
boon in many situations, we knew that
some readers would baulk at building
it. While the board is quite packed,
none of the parts are that small. Still,
it wasn’t too much work to come up
siliconchip.com.au
Features
☑ Based on the PGA2311UA stereo digital volume
control IC
☑ Two independent channels (expandable
up to four, six or more)
☑ Automatically remembers the last
volume setting
☑ Volume adjusted by a rotary
☑
☑
☑
☑
☑
☑
control on the front panel or
universal IR remote control
Mute function (remote control only)
Soft start at power-up
‘Clickless’ design
Controlled by a PIC16F15214
microcontroller and TSOP4136 IR
receiver
Operates from a preamp power
supply from ±8V to ±30V
Optional LED indicator showing
IR and volume change activity
The SMD version of the Digital
Potentiometer is a little larger than a
dollar coin and just wide enough for
the rotary encoder and IR receiver to fit.
And for those who don’t want to squint
while building it, there’s the larger
through-hole version shown below.
Specifications
☑ Gain and attenuation range:
+31.5dB to -95.5dB in 0.5dB steps
☑ Channel gain match typically
within ±0.05dB
☑ 0.0002% distortion
☑
☑
☑
☑
☑
at 1kHz (using the
-UA version of the
IC) – see Fig.1
Frequency response:
essentially flat from 20Hz to
20kHz
Able to drive 600W
W loads
Input resistance: 10kW
W
Signal handling: 2.5V RMS
maximum input level
Output level: up to 2.5V RMS (7.5V
peak-to-peak)
Australia's electronics magazine
This prototype used a
TSOP2136, instead of the
recommended TSOP4136,
which is why the IR receiver is shown
mounted on the outer set of pads.
Refer to the text on page 36.
March 2023 31
Fig.1: THD and THD+N vs frequency plots for the Digital Pot for both channels –
nothing to see here, folks! Move along! You’ll get similar or better performance
from this design compared to a regular, passive potentiometer.
even in these times of IC shortages.
The PGA2311 contains a resistor
network and analog switch along with
switched resistors in the feedback network of the output buffer amplifier, as
shown in Fig.2. This allows the device
not only to attenuate but also to provide up to 31.5dB gain. Pay attention
to this; turning it up too high when
you don’t have an input signal leads
to a loud surprise!
This IC is very quiet, so do not
expect to hear hiss or noise to warn
you that the volume level is high.
While these ICs can provide up
to 31.5dB gain, we limited the Electronic Volume Control gain to +10dB.
An alternative firmware allows you
to run up to +31.5dB, but be warned
that this is an awful lot of gain.
Circuit details
Fig.2: this shows what is inside the PGA2311 (and PGA2310, PGA2320) ICs.
The switched resistive attenuator and switched feedback in the output amplifier
allow for a wide range of gain and attenuation settings.
with a through-hole equivalent design,
so that is what I did.
I checked its performance and found
it to be close enough to the SMD version that nobody would notice an audible difference. So if you have room
to fit a larger board, it is certainly an
option. Its circuit is identical; it just
uses physically larger components on
a different PCB that measures 79mm
wide and 57mm deep.
Performance & IC choice
The specifications panel and Fig.1
show the performance of the prototypes. There’s so little noise and distortion that it certainly won’t be audible
and will not affect the audio quality
of even the best amplifiers.
We measured the distortion of five
prototypes, and all were in the 0.00020.0003% distortion region, which is
32
Silicon Chip
close to the measurement limit of our
test equipment.
The heart of the project is the
PGA2311 Volume Control IC from
Texas Instruments. The PGA2320 or
PGA2310 can also be used with identical performance, but those versions
are much more expensive for reasons
we cannot explain, other than they can
operate from higher ±15V supply rails
compared to ±5V.
You need to use one of the PGA2311
chips with a UA suffix to get the
specified performance. The obsolete CS3310 will also work just fine,
and they are still reasonably easy to
find on the grey market (eBay, AliExpress etc).
Still, all of those options will give
acceptable performance. In short, we
are confident that you will find one volume IC or another to fit on your board,
Australia's electronics magazine
The Digital Pot circuit is shown in
Fig.3; there is not much to it. There are
a couple of things on the board beyond
IC2, the PGA2311 (or equivalent), PIC
microcontroller IC1, rotary encoder
RE1, IR receiver IRR1 and some power
supply components.
The audio performance of this project is almost entirely determined by
the PGA2311, as there is nothing else
in the signal path. The left channel signal is fed in via pin 1 of CON2, goes
straight into IC2’s input pin 16, out of
its output pin 14 to pin 2 of CON2, for
feeding to the amplifier (or whatever
is downstream). The other channel is
routed similarly, via CON1.
We have included input protection
with a BAT54S dual schottky diode (or
a pair of BAT85s on the through-hole
version) from each input pin to the
supply rails. This way, if the input is
over-driven, the diodes will conduct
and help to protect the PGA2311 from
damage.
We decided not to include DC-
blocking capacitors on either the
input or output. The reason is that
four bipolar capacitors would have
added probably 20% to the PCB size.
We expect these will be in your signal chain already (after all, if you’re
replacing a mechanical pot, you won’t
be applying DC to it) and the output
offset voltage of the PGA2311 is only
0.25mV at 0dB gain.
If you have DC in your signal chain,
you will need to include a blocking
capacitor in series with the Digital Pot
– we recommend a 10μF 25V bipolar
electrolytic capacitor. You can also
siliconchip.com.au
use two regular 10μF 25V electrolytics connected in series, negative-to-
negative or positive-to-positive. Both
options will have no noticeable effect
on the audio.
With the outputs, we are assuming
that the Digital Pot will drive short
cables to your amplifier or follow on
circuitry. The PGA2311 can drive
600W loads and has a short-circuit current of 50mA, so it is unlikely to misbehave if presented with an unusual
load.
Still, if you intend to drive long
cables with this, add a 100W resistor
in series with each output. A convenient place for this would be at your
output socket.
Controller
Power supply
If the PGA2311 is the heart of this
design, the 8-pin PIC16F15214 is the
brain. We discussed the capabilities of
this chip in April 2022 (siliconchip.
au/Article/15277).
The main job of the software running on this PIC is to monitor the rotary
encoder and, if it is turned, send a signal to IC2 to adjust the volume appropriately.
It also looks for signals from the
infrared receiver and, if it receives
a valid signal from a remote control,
also figures out what command to
send to IC2 in response. We’ll have
more details on how the software
works later.
IC2 operates from ±5V supply rails.
To allow a wide variety of amplifier/
preamplifier supply rails to be used
to run this board, we have onboard
78(L)05 or 79(L)05 regulators.
This means you can power the Digital Pot from split supply rails from
±8V to ±30V, which should suit most
applications. A typical preamp will
have such rails available, and some
smaller amplifiers without preamps
might too.
In keeping with the design concept,
the power supply is very simple. The
PGA2311 has a typical power supply rejection ratio (PSRR) of 100dB
at 250Hz, so any noise that the basic
Fig.3: the complete circuit for the Digital Pot; this applies to
both the SMD and through-hole versions. Just note that D1a/D1b
and D2a/D2b are two dual diodes in the SMD version or four
individual diodes in the other. The only extra part not shown
here is the optional LED indicator that plugs into CON4.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 33
linear regulators let through will not
realistically affect performance. Of
course, you could ‘roll your own’ lownoise ±5V DC supply and delete the
regulators as an upgrade.
Suppose you want to fit the Digital
Pot into a power amplifier with only
split supply rails above ±30V. In that
case, you could connect 5W zener
diodes in series with the two supply rails to drop them into the Digital
Pot’s acceptable range. It only draws a
few tens of milliamps, so that should
work for just about any amplifier. Just
ensure the zener polarities are correct
(anode to pin 1 of CON3; other cathode to pin 3).
If you use the PGA2310 or PGA2320
devices, you also have the option of
increasing the analog supply rails as
high as ±15V. This will make no difference in the vast majority of applications, but the choice is there. The
simplest way of doing this is to drop
in 78(L)15 and 79(L)15 regulators for
REG2 and REG3, respectively. Don’t
change REG1 to a higher voltage type.
Firmware
The source code and HEX file for
this project are available for download
from the Silicon Chip website. We can
also supply microcontrollers already
loaded with the appropriate HEX file.
On boot-up, the software configures
several registers to set the processor
clock speed to 4MHz, much lower
than the maximum, and starts a timer
for measuring IR signals. It then loads
the saved volume level and remote
control configuration from flash memory, checks to see if the user wants to
change the remote code and, if not,
ramps the volume from zero to the last
used value over a couple of seconds.
It then monitors the rotary encoder
and IR input ports for action, and if
anything happens, decides if the rotary
encoder is being turned up or down or
reads the IR stream to see what code
was transmitted.
The software writes a new volume level value to the PGA2311 IC if
required. Then, if there are no changes
for about 10 seconds, it saves the new
volume level to flash memory.
Modulated infrared signals are
received by the TSOP4136, which
includes an IR detector, 36kHz bandpass filter and output driver. The result
is a digital serial stream including
intentional signals from your remote
control and also ambient light noise.
34
Silicon Chip
IR Signal Decoding
With Manchester encoding, a logic one is transmitted as a high-to-low transition, while a “0” is a low-to-high transition – see Fig.4. As transmission starts
with a one bit, we know that there is a high level, then a low level, at the start
of every transmission.
Fig.4: the Manchester Encoding scheme used by the RC-5 remote control scheme.
This encoding results in no DC component, a well-defined frequency range, and the
ability of a receiver to work out the clock rate from the serial data stream.
The decoder described here works well and is a good example of a simple
state machine. Let’s start by listing what we know:
● A one is encoded as a period of no IR signal for 890μs (nominally), followed
by an IR signal for the same time; zero is the reverse. We need to allow
for some variation in the transmitter’s clock and thus periods (say ±10%).
● The IR level will never remain the same for much less than the nominally
890μs period, or much more than 1780μs if a zero follows a one or a one
follows a zero.
● We are looking for 14 bits of data.
The state machine states, shown in Fig.5, are as follows.
A Clear any stored value and wait for an IR signal to be present. Set the first
bit to one (we know this is true if it is a valid signal) and go to state B.
B We are receiving a one. Measure the time until the IR signal stops. If this
was too short (say, less than 890μs minus 10%), this is noise; go to state A.
if the time was short (closer to 890μs than 1780μs), we have just received
another one. Store this and go to state C.
if the time was long (closer to 1780μs than 890μs), then we are receiving a zero. Store this and go to state D.
if the time was far too long (more than 1780μs plus 10%), this is noise,
so go to state A.
C We just received an IR pulse starting with a one after having already received
a one (there is no IR signal just now). Measure the time until we see an IR signal again.
if we see it too soon, this is noise; go to state A.
if the time was short, that is to be expected; store the bit and go to state B.
if the time was longer than that, this is noise; go to state A.
D We just received a zero; there is no IR signal now. Wait until the IR signal
starts again.
if we see no IR for too short a time, this is noise; go to state A.
if we see no IR for a short time, we have just received another zero. Store
this and go to state E.
if we see no IR for a long time, we are receiving a one. Store this and
go to state C.
if there was no IR for longer than that, this is noise; go to state A.
E We just received an IR pulse for a zero after a zero (there is an IR signal
present now). Measure the time until we see no IR signal again.
if this is less than a short pulse, this is noise; go to state A.
if we see no IR for a short time, that is to be expected; go to state D.
if we see no IR for longer than that, this is noise; go to state A.
If the software receives all 14 valid bits using the above method, it is considered a valid command and processed, then it returns to state A, ready to
receive another command. Otherwise, it throws the data away as it is considered noise. Fig.5 overleaf shows this as a “state diagram”.
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.5: the IR decoder state machine built into the software. This demonstrates how
complex logic can be decomposed into a (relatively) simple flow chart and then
implemented in logic or software. Writing software can become difficult without
breaking the logic down like this.
Noise will include ‘signals’ from
lights, the sun and other IR remotes
in the room. The IR receiver’s internal
bandpass filter is not 100% effective at
blocking this noise, but it helps a lot
by reducing it to a manageable level.
While a little old now, Philips RC-5
IR codes are prevalent, and virtually
all universal remote controls can generate them. RC-5 IR transmissions each
contain 14 bits of data. That’s broken
down into five address bits (32 possible values for TV, VCR, DVD, receiver
etc) and six command bits (64 possible values).
The stream commences with two
start bits and a ‘toggle’ bit that inverts
with each subsequent command. The
data is ‘Manchester encoded’, a clever
way of sending a string of ones and
zeros on a serial line while embedding
a clock signal into it. Our PIC reverses
this scheme to decode the serial stream
of data from the TSOP4136; more
detail on this is provided in the “IR
Signal Decoding” panel.
The PIC microcontroller untangles
all this to extract commands from our
remote and change the volume or toggle the mute status.
PCB design method
We thought it might be interesting to
show what we do when designing such
a tightly packed board and how we are
sure it will all fit. Fig.6 is a 3D rendering of the PCB from Altium during
the design phase. Compare this to the
actual prototype; it’s pretty close.
This depends on us entering the
right models for every component, but
you only need to do this once. After
Note: the headers are
swapped in the final
version compared to the
photos to make it easier to
use shielded cable for
the audio.
Enlarged views of the SMD version
of the Digital Volume Control
Potentiometer. Note the different IR
receiver, as we tested a few common types.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.6: this is the 3D rendering we
produced using Altium to verify that
everything was going to fit. The final
result looks remarkably similar.
that, we can run interference checks
and even get a rendering of what it
will look like once assembled. We can
spin it around to ensure there are no
component collisions (and Altium can
warn us if there are).
Construction
First, you need to choose which
board you want to build. The SMD version is suitable for relative beginners
as it has a handful of surface mount
parts but no really fine pitch components. That said, if you have room for
the full-size board, it might save you
some squinting to build that. This
especially applies to those of us with
a few extra ‘miles on the clock’.
SMD version
The SMD version is built on a
double-
sided PCB coded 01101231
that measures 25.5 × 36.5mm, with the
components placed as shown in Fig.7.
Components are mounted on both
sides to keep the final result compact.
You might want to use a small vice or
some Blu-Tack to stop the PCB from
slipping around on the bench while
you work on it.
Start by soldering the 10kW resistor on the back of the board. Next, fit
the 100nF capacitors. Four are on the
board’s back, and two are on the front.
Next, fit the PGA2311 IC (or similar)
and the PIC16F15124 microcontroller.
In both cases, ensure you have identified pin 1 and orientated it as shown
in Fig.7 and the PCB silkscreen before
tacking one pin. Then check the alignment of the other pins before soldering
March 2023 35
them. If they are off, remelt the first
solder joint and gently nudge the IC
into position.
Adding a bit of flux paste along the
rows of pins before applying solder is
recommended, as it makes the solder
flow much better, to form good joints.
With flux paste on the pins, you just
need to load a little solder on your iron
and then touch it to the junction of the
pin and pad, and it should flow onto
them and form a good joint.
With practice, you can even drag the
iron down the pins to solder them in
rapid succession.
After soldering, check carefully to
ensure all the joints are good and no
pins are bridged to adjacent pins with
solder. If they are, add a bit more flux
paste and then apply some solder wick
to suck up the excess solder and clear
the bridge.
Now flip the board and solder the
two dual BAT54S schottky diodes.
These are SOT-23 package devices
and the smallest parts you will need
to deal with, but luckily, the pins are
relatively widely spaced. Once you
have these on the board, it is all downhill from there.
Next, fit all five 10µF 35V SMD
electrolytic capacitors (or, even better,
10µF 35V/50V SMD ceramics). If using
electrolytics, orientate them as shown;
the base has a chamfer at the positive
end. You can use a small amount of
solder to wet one pad and tack the
capacitor lead to hold it in place before
properly soldering both pins.
Leave that fine tip on your soldering iron, as while the remaining parts
are through-hole types, many of these
parts use smaller pads to fit the tracks
onto the PCB. Solder in the three voltage regulators next. Be careful to get
Fig.8: the through-hole
PCB is electrically
identical to the SMD
version but somewhat
larger. For both IC1 and
IC2, you can fit a part
in a DIP (through-hole)
or SOIC SMD package.
Be careful which way
around you install the
regulators and ICs, and
note the extra pad next
to CON4 so that multiple
units can be ‘ganged
up’ for four or more
channels.
the 78(L)05 and 79(L)05 devices in the
right spots.
Next, mount the power and output
connectors. We have chosen different
types for these to make it less likely
that the power will be inadvertently
plugged into the audio connector. It is
possible to solder wires directly to the
PCB, but connectors provide a more
professional finish and make for easier assembly and maintenance.
A two-pin header is used as a jumper
to isolate the IR receiver in case IC1
needs to be reprogrammed. If you need
to program your PIC, install this header
but not fit the jumper until after the
PIC is programmed. If you are using a
pre-programmed PIC, you can insert
the jumper before or immediately after
soldering it.
The final part to install is the IR
receiver. There are many similar types
on the market, but they have annoying pinout differences. Some have the
+ and – power supply pins swapped!
Check the ones you buy carefully;
the specified TSOP4136 devices
have GND on the middle pin and
fit the inner set of holes on the PCB.
TSOP2136 devices have GND on an
outer pin, matching the pads nearest
the PCB edge.
Through-hole version
The through-hole version is built
on a double-sided PCB that’s coded
01101232 and measures 78.5 × 57mm.
The parts layout on this board is shown
in Fig.8.
This board allows the use of all
through-hole parts or, alternatively,
you can use the surface-mounting versions of the PIC microcontroller and/
or PGA2311 IC. This makes sourcing parts easier. All the remaining
through-hole parts are very common,
so we do not envisage any difficulties
in sourcing them.
The assembly order is essentially
the same as for the SMD version,
listed above, with a few minor differences besides the different component
packages. The main one is that the two
dual SMD diodes are replaced with
four individual leaded diodes. Also
note that the through-hole electrolytics have their positive sides indicated
using longer leads, which go towards
Fig.7: the SMD version is very compact but is identical in performance and function to the larger through-hole version. If
using 10μF ceramic capacitors instead of electrolytic (which we would recommend), they will fit on the same pads but are
not polarised. You can use the same type of connector for CON3 as CON1 & CON2 but then there is a risk of accidentally
plugging the power cable into the wrong header and doing damage.
Choosing an infrared remote control
We tested several remotes during development, including the Altronics A1012A.
We programmed this for TV codes 0088, 0154, 0169 and others and AUX codes
0734, 0846, 0727 and others. We also tested a “One For All” remote and found
it worked with TV code 0556 and RCVR/AMP code 1269.
The easiest way to set this up for your remote is to plug the IR activity LED
into the program port and watch for the LED lighting when you press buttons
on the remote. Flashing indicates that valid IR codes are being received. It’s
then just a matter of trying different codes (starting with Philips TVs) until
you find one that works. You only need the volume up/down and mute button
codes to be correct.
36
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
the + symbols on the board.
For the regulators, you might as
well use the same 78L05 and 79L05
devices as used on the SMD version;
orientate them as per the smaller
semi-cylindrical footprints shown in
Fig.8. However, you can also use the
7805/7905 or equivalent TO-220 regulators if you happen to have them on
hand; the required orientation of those
devices is also shown in Fig.8.
Otherwise, follow the same order of
assembly as the SMD version, referring
to the section above. After that, you
can install the four “feet” comprising
tapped spacers held into the corner
mounting holes with machine screws.
These are not only handy during testing; you can use them to mount the
more hefty through-hole board to the
chassis later.
Activity LED
An activity LED is a useful thing
to have; one that flashes at power-up,
when valid infrared commands are
received and when the encoder is
rotated. To provide for this, the firmware stretches the length of the CS
‘chip select’ signal to the PGA2311
IC. By connecting our LED and resistor between this line and the 5V rail,
it will light up whenever commands
are sent to that IC.
This is a bit cheeky, as we are using
the chip select line for two purposes:
while the CS line is low to enable the
PGA2311’s digital interface, it also
drives current through the activity LED
to light it. To make the flash visible,
we need to extend these pulses from
what is required (just a few microseconds) to tens of milliseconds.
The wiring for the optional activity LED is shown in Fig.9. It is done
by soldering the light-duty figure-up
cable to two pins on a female header
with three to five pins. You can cut
this from a longer header strip. It then
plugs onto CON4 and allows you to
mount the LED in a visible location,
eg, on the front panel of your amplifier
using a bezel. Try to keep this lead to a
modest length (~10cm), as it helps to
prevent noise getting on the CS line.
Programming IC1
If you got IC1 from Silicon Chip, it
should be pre-programmed and ready
to go. If using a blank microcontroller,
you will have to program it in-circuit
for the SMD version (unless you have
an SOIC programming socket). With
siliconchip.com.au
Parts List – Digital Volume Control ‘Potentiometer’
1 universal remote control [Altronics A1012A]
1 rotary encoder (RE1) [Altronics S3350 or EN11-VNM1BF15 (Mouser)]
2 3-pin vertical polarised headers, 2.54mm pitch (CON1, CON2)
[Altronics P5493]
2 3-way polarised header plugs with pins (for audio signals via CON1, CON2)
[Altronics P5473 + 3 x P5470A]
1 3-pin JST style header, 2.54mm pitch (CON3) [Altronics P5743]
1 3-pin JST style plug, 2.54mm pitch (for power via CON3)
[2 x Altronics P5743 + 6 x Altronics P5750]
1 2-pin vertical header, 2.54mm pitch, plus jumper shunt (JP1)
1 TSOP4136 or similar IR receiver, SIL-3 (IRR1)
[Altronics Z1611A, Jaycar ZD1953, Mouser 782-TSOP4136]
Additional components for the SMD version
1 double-sided PCB coded 01101231, 25.5 × 36.5mm
1 6-pin SMD vertical header, 2.54mm pitch (CON4) (optional; for ICSP,
activity LED and/or multi-channel use) [Altronics P5435]
1 PIC16F15214-I/SN 8-bit microcontroller programmed with 0110123A.HEX,
SOIC-8 (IC1)
1 PGA2311, PGA2310, PGA2320 or CS3310 digital volume control IC,
wide SOIC-16 (IC2)
2 78L05 +5V 100mA linear regulators, TO-92 (REG1, REG2)
1 79L05 -5V 100mA linear regulator, TO-92 (REG3)
2 BAT54S 25V 200mA dual series SMD schottky diodes, SOT-23 (D1, D2)
[Altronics Y0075]
5 10μF 35V SMD electrolytic capacitors, 5.3×5.3mm [Altronics R9442] OR
5 10μF 35V/50V SMD ceramic capacitors, X5R or X7R, M3216/1206 size
6 100nF 50V X7R SMD ceramic capacitors, M3216 size [Altronics R9935]
1 10kW SMD resistor, M2012/0805 size [Altronics R1148]
Additional components for the through-hole version
1 double-sided PCB coded 01101232, 78.5 × 57mm
1 6-pin vertical header, 2.54mm pitch (CON4)
(optional; for ICSP, activity LED and/or multi-channel use)
1 8-pin DIL IC socket (optional; for IC1 if DIP version used)
1 PIC16F15214 8-bit microcontroller programmed with 0110123A.HEX,
DIP-8 or SOIC-8 (IC1)
1 PGA2311, PGA2310, PGA2320 or CS3310 digital volume control IC,
DIP-16 or wide SOIC-16 (IC2)
2 78L05 or 7805 +5V 100mA/1A linear regulators, TO-92 or TO-220
(REG1, REG2)
1 79L05 or 7905 -5V 100mA/1A linear regulator, TO-92 or TO-220 (REG3)
4 BAT85 30V 200mA schottky diodes (D1a/b, D2a/b) [Altronics Z0044]
5 10μF 50V low-ESR radial electrolytic capacitors, 5mm diameter
[Altronics R6067]
6 100nF 50V X7R multi-layer ceramic capacitors, 5mm pitch
[Altronics R2931]
1 10kW ¼W resistor
4 M3-tapped spacers (for mounting PCB)
8 M3 × 6mm panhead machine screws (for mounting PCB)
4 M3 shakeproof washers (for mounting PCB)
Optional parts for activity LED (suits either version)
1 LED with bezel and series current-limiting resistor
1 length of light-duty figure-8 wire, to suit installation
1 3-pin, 4-pin or 5-pin female header, 2.54mm pitch
Most SMD headers, including Altronics Cat P5435, have the pins staggered
on either side of the header. The PCB requires the pins to all be on one
side. This can generally be achieved by snapping or cutting off a 5-pin or
6-pin length of the header and rotating the even-numbered pins by 180°.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 37
Fig.9: this circuit shows how to add
an IR activity LED. We piggyback
off the CS line for the PG2311 IC,
which itself re-purposes the incircuit serial programming data
line. It can be a 3-, 4- or 5-pin
header as long as it’s plugged into
CON4 so the correct connections
are made; you can adjust the
resistor value to suit the LED used.
the through-hole version, you can program it in-circuit or off-board before
fitting it (or even afterwards if you’re
using an IC socket).
For programming it in-circuit,
remove JP1 and plug a programmer
like a PICkit 4 or Snap programmer
into CON4 with its pin 1 in the correct position. With the PICkit 4, you
can get the programmer to deliver
power during programming. For the
Snap programmer, it’s probably easiest to apply 12V DC between the +VE
and GND pins of power header CON3
during programming.
Using MPLAB IPE, select the correct
device (PIC16F15214), load the HEX
file (available for download from the
Silicon Chip website), enable power
from the programmer if necessary,
then connect to the chip and press
the program button. It should only
take a couple of seconds to load the
firmware, and you will see a success
For multi-channel use, a
‘slave’ version of either the
through-hole or SMD version can
be built using less components. See
the panel overleaf for more details.
message (or an error message if something goes wrong).
Remember to re-fit the shorting
block to JP1 after disconnecting the
programmer.
Changing remote control code
The software can decode RC5 signals with any valid TV or “Receiver”
address. The software defaults to the
TV on first power-up, and if you do
not need to change this, there is nothing to do.
If you have another Philips TV
remote in the room and need to use
an alternative code, here is how to
set the Digital Pot to use the Philips
Receiver codes:
To set the remote using a TV code:
1 Remove power from the Digital
Pot.
2 Short pins 3 & 5 of CON4.
3 Apply power to the Digital Pot.
4 Wait a couple of seconds
Are AliExpress PGA2311 ICs any good?
We bought some PGA2311 chips from AliExpress (www.aliexpress.com/
item/1005003043805799.html). We built and measured the performance of
a Digital Pot using one of these, and it worked just fine – see Fig.10. At $20.73
for five ICs, this is a rather attractive option!
5 Remove power from the Digital
Pot.
6 Remove the short between pins
3 & 5 of CON4.
To set it to accept a Philips Receiver
remote control code, go through the
steps above but instead, put the jumper
between pins 3 & 4 of CON4.
This procedure is the same for the
through-hole or SMD versions, but if
you haven’t fitted CON4, you will need
to do so. Note that pin 1 of this header
on the SMD board is nearest to the PIC
microcontroller.
Troubleshooting
If it isn’t working as expected, check
the following:
1 Is there 5V DC ±0.25V on the
+5VD (IC2 pins 1, 4 and 8) and +5VA
(IC2 pin 12) rails?
If not, check for any parts getting hot.
Verify that you are providing a
minimum of 7V DC to the PCB positive input.
Do you have the right parts for
REG1 & REG2, in the correct orientations?
2 Are IC1 and IC2 soldered properly? Take a close-up photo if your
phone has this function; it is surprising how zoomed-in you can get with
some phones.
3 Is there activity on the encoder
lines (pins 2 & 3 of IC1)?
If you have a ‘scope, probe pins
2 and 3 of IC1 and see if they are at
more than 3V, pulsing low as you
rotate the encoder. If not, check that
you have used a suitable encoder –
there are a bewildering variety of
rotary encoders; the recommended
Altronics and Mouser parts have
been tested to work.
↪
↪
↪
↪
Fig.10: despite costing just over $4 each, the board built with the PGA2311UAs we
got from AliExpress gave extremely low THD readings, just like the boards built with
chips from more reputable vendors.
38
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
4 Power up the board and monitor
the CS line with an oscilloscope (IC1
pin 7). On power-up, the micro writes
data to the PGA2311 for a couple of
seconds to ramp the volume.
If this signal is present, the PIC
is running and programmed correctly.
If you don’t have an oscilloscope, watch the LED very closely
in a darkened room on power-up.
After power is applied, you should
see the LED light dimly for a second or two.
If there is no activity on the
CS line, go back and check power
and check that your micro is programmed. You can also monitor
the SDI and SCLK lines (IC1 pins 5
and 6) for activity. These should be
active for the first second or so after
power-up and when the encoder is
rotated.
5 If the IR remote does not work:
Have you installed the shunt
on JP1?
Have you put the TSOP4136 in
the right location?
Check the signal on JP1 or pin 2 of
the TSOP4136 with an oscilloscope;
there should be clear activity when
the remote buttons are pressed.
Have you programmed the
remote with the right code? If using
a universal remote, you will likely
need to try a few of the configuration numbers for your remote to get
it working. Install the activity LED
and watch for the LED to flash; this
will tell you that the remote is transmitting codes that work.
Note that if you need to program
your PIC on the board, you will need
to remove the shunt from JP1. Many
TSOP4136 devices otherwise stop
the PIC from being programmed.
Remember to reinstall the shunt
SC
after programming.
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
↪
Volume Control Pot Kit
There are two kits for this project:
• SMD version: SC6623 ($60)
• Through-hole: SC6624 ($70)
Note that the latter may be supplied
with IC2 (the PGA2311) in the
wide SOIC-16 package due to the
limited availability of through-hole
equivalents.
The kits include all relevant parts
in the parts list except the universal
remote control and extra parts for
the activity LED.
siliconchip.com.au
Ganging up multiple boards for more than two channels
One really useful feature of this Digital Pot design is that it is easy to run one
as a master and one or more as slaves. This allows one volume control or
remote to set the level on four, six or more channels.
This is great if you are making a home theatre system and want to use your
own amplifiers. It is also handy if you want to control multiple channel levels
in a multi-room system or need to adjust the level of multiple channels from
one control.
You can use either the through-hole or SMD versions to do this. The master
is fitted with all the parts, while the slave(s) have the microcontroller, rotary
encoder, infrared receiver, REG1 and associated parts left off.
You need to have the programming header fitted to all the boards, and importantly, it must have six pins rather than five. The extra pin goes into or onto a
pad labelled SCLK, right at the end of the programming header, allowing you
to extend it by an extra pin.
You then run a cable to join all the six-pin programming headers in parallel.
That’s all you have to do! But remember to leave off the PIC microcontroller,
REG1, IR receiver and encoder on each slave board. Otherwise, they will interfere with the master.
To make a six-way ribbon cable that can join the boards, you can use two
Altronics P5380 header sockets (or cut two 6-pin sections from a P5390 or
similar strip). Wire pins 1-1 through 6-6 together using ribbon cable and insulate the soldered connections using 3mm diameter heatshrink tubing. Mark
pin 1 at each end so you don’t accidentally swap them! That could cause damage to one or more boards.
We tested this using 200mm of ribbon cable with no problems. This interface
does not have fast data, so we expect you can stretch this a little if needed.
You could also use a 12-way ribbon cable with IDC connectors as long as
you were careful to plug the six-pin header into the same subset of the 12 pins
on each connector. That might be easier since crimping IDC headers onto a
ribbon cable only takes a few seconds with the right tool.
Note that you still need to provide power to all boards (master and slave)
since only the 5V digital power rail is carried on the connecting cable. They
will generate independent split analog supplies.
With the power connections made and the programming headers joined,
you just need to connect the audio inputs and outputs to your various channels, ensure JP1 is fitted only on the master board, then power it up and go
through the regular testing procedure.
Note that the SCLK pin is at opposite ends of programming header CON4
on the SMD and through-hole boards, so you can’t mix the different board
types (at least not without re-routing that signal between them). Also note
that if you want to connect an IR activity LED to multiple ganged Digital Pots,
you will need to split out those two wires from the harness to go to the LED
and series resistor.
This simple cable allows the master & slave Digital Pot boards to be ganged up
to make a four-channel volume control. It can be extended to three boards for six
channels and so on.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 39
Make amazing prints with our wide range of
Resin & Filament
for 3D Printers
0
OV E R 2 I N S
RE S
CK &
IN S TO G!
IN
COUNT
FROM
3995
$
EA
AVAILABLE IN
500G OR 1KG
HIGH QUALITY RESIN
Made specifically for colour or mono LCD/LED light source printers.
Bio-Based PLA Resin
Standard Resin
PLA Pro
Water Washable Resin
• Low smell
• High precision
• Smooth surface
• Can be drilled
• Available in Red, Yellow, White,
Black, Gray, Blue & Clear
• High hardness & rigidity
• Good moulding accuracy
• Easy to print thin-walled part
• Smooth printing surface
• Available in Red, Yellow, White,
Black, Gray, Sky Blue & Clear
• Higher resolution & precision
• High strength & toughness
(balanced performance)
• Available in Gray, Black & White
• Wash print in plain water
• High precision
• Low viscosity
• High release rate
• Available in White, Clear, Black
& Gray
Great for making model toys
1KG TL4433-TL4439 $59.95 EA
High quality resin with low viscosity
1KG TL4443-TL4449 $69.95 EA
A bio-based PLA resin which has
excellent resolution
1KG TL4440-TL4442 $59.95 EA
Easy washup - great for large models
500G TL4450-TL4453 $39.95 EA
Shop Jaycar for your 3D Printing needs:
• 2 Models of Resin Printer, with over 45 types of resin
• 8 Models of Filament Printer, with over 50 types of filament
and counting!
• Massive range of 3D Printer spare parts & accessories
PLA+
1KG
3995
5
OV E R 2
$
EA
TL4454-TL4464
NT S
FIL A ME &
CK
IN S TO G!
IN
COUNT
1KG
3995
$
EA
TL4465-TL4471
EXOTIC RANGE
INCLUDES RAINBOW
1KG FROM
39
$
95
EA
TL4477-TL4480
Are 100% bio-degradable and FDA
food safety approved.
• 10 times stronger than regular PLA
• Smoother prints
• Low material shrinkage rate
• No cracking or brittle issues
• 12 colours to choose from
PETG
Stronger than regular PLA
• Smooth & delicate prints
• Low material shrinkage rate
• No cracking or brittle issues
• 7 colours to choose from
eSILK
Made from a special mix of PLA+
and certain additives to give a
glossy and slightly transparent
appearance when printed.
• Choose from Gold, Silver, Copper
and Rainbow colours
ABS+
1KG
3995
$
EA
TL4472-TL4475
HIGH QUALITY FILAMENT
Are extremely durable, lightweight
alternatives to PETG and PLA.
Able to withstand heat and stress without
cracking or weakening, finished prints
will hide blemishes & minor print issues.
• Durable and lightweight
• No cracking or brittle issues
• Highly resistant to chemicals
• 4 colours to choose from
High quality 3D filament, known for producing smoother prints & better adhesion.
Our expanded range of filament colours and types includes some new exotics to
help ensure we have the right filament for your next work of art.
Explore our wide range of resins, filaments and accessories, in stock
on our website, or at over 110 stores or 130 resellers nationwide.
jaycar.com.au/3dprinting
1800 022 888
Prices correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
Model
Railway
e
l
b
a
t
n
Tur
By Les Kerr
This Turntable is an excellent addition to just about any model railway layout. It
allows you to turn a locomotive around at the end of a track and automatically
reverses power to the rails, so they aren’t shorted out. The electronics are easy
to build, while the other parts can be made with moderate machining skills.
R
ailway turntables have been
around since 1830. Some early
engines could only run in one
direction, so there needed to be a way
to turn them around. The solution was
to lay rails on a bridge and then mount
the whole assembly on a bearing.
To reduce sag as the engine moved
onto the ‘table’, four wheels on the
bridge extremities transferred the
weight to a circular rail that ran around
the perimeter.
Initially, the turntables were rotated
by hand, but later on, they were motorised. I can remember as a young lad
being fascinated that the driver and
fireman could push a massive steam
42
Silicon Chip
engine through 180° with little effort.
In Australia, most major country towns
on the railways had one.
Still, once the steam era ended, they
fell into decline as the diesel engines
were double-ended; ie, they could be
driven from both ends.
As I run Peckett-style tank engines
on my OO gauge model railway, I
searched the internet for a suitably-
sized turntable and found one at Swanage in the UK. I based my design on
that, and you can see it operating in
the video at siliconchip.au/Videos/
Model+Railway+Turntable
If you have larger engines, the
design can be used by increasing its
Australia's electronics magazine
dimensions. The only restriction is
the maximum diameter that your lathe
can turn.
I am using a bipolar 200-step stepper
motor to rotate the train deck. As you
need to line up the moving rails with
the stationary rails precisely, the motor
is driven using eight micro steps. This
means the motor moves through ⅛th of
a step for each controller input pulse.
To rotate it 180°, you need to pulse the
motor 800 times, giving better accuracy than in single-step mode.
The other challenge is that you need
to provide power to the rotating rails
and need to reverse the rail polarity
once the turntable has rotated through
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.1: this diagram shows the order in which the major parts are assembled in the stack. The Spring Tension Spacer
may not be required, or it might need to be thicker; that can be determined during final assembly.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 43
SPRING LOADED CONNECTOR PINS
(ONE FOR EACH RAIL)
ROTATING
RAIL PLATFORM
WHEEL
ASS’Y
RAILS
WHEEL
ASS’Y
GIRDER
INSULATOR
SPRING TENSION
SPACER
STATIONARY
RAIL PLATE
CENTRING
INSERT
BOTTOM PCB
(SEE BELOW)
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
SPACER
STEPPER MOTOR
(NEMA 17)
TRAIN CONTROLLER
NEGATIVE SUPPLY
PCB HELD IN PLACE ON
STATIONARY RAIL PLATE
BY PINS THROUGH
THESE HOLES
TRAIN CONTROLLER
POSITIVE SUPPLY
BOTTOM PCB,
VIEWED FROM THE
PIN CONNECTION SIDE
Fig.2: this ‘cutaway’ overview of the Turntable doesn’t include all the parts
and details, but it shows how most of the parts go together.
Fig.3: the Centring Insert fits inside the Housing and keeps the stepper
motor and Turntable aligned.
44
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
180°. To achieve this, I used two goldplated spring-loaded pins (shown in
Fig.2), one connected to each moving
rail. The spring-loaded parts of the
pin make contact with the tracks on
the stationary gold-plated PCB below.
Initially, the first pin is connected
to the positive terminal of the controller and the second pin is connected
to the negative pin. When the rails
rotate through 180°, the connections
are swapped.
You will need a lathe and a milling
machine to make the various parts. The
rails must line up in both the vertical
and horizontal planes, so it is essential
that you use the dials (without backlash) on your milling machine to set
the distance between holes and centre
lines. Where possible, you should do
all operations to the part in one session.
To help align the rails in the vertical
direction on the Turntable, I placed a
grub screw near the end of each rail.
By rotating the grub screws clockwise,
I could jack up the rail and reduce the
height by turning them in the opposite direction.
Fig.1 shows the various parts that
make up the Turntable. I will go through
each one in detail. The materials
needed are all shown in the parts list.
#1 Centring Insert
Photo 1 shows the Centring Insert
(Fig.3) fitted into the Housing, made
from a piece of 65mm diameter aluminium round bar. Its purpose is to
hold the stepper motor axis precisely
in line with the axis of the base, ie,
on-centre. The critical dimension is
the 22mm hole through its centre,
which must match the size of the
locating boss on the top of the stepper
motor assembly.
In boring the hole, when I was just
below the 22mm diameter, I made
1/1000th of an inch (25-micron) passes
until the stepper motor just slid into
place. To do this, mount the bar in a
three-jaw lathe chuck so that at least
8mm protrudes. Face the end and
reduce the outer diameter to 64mm.
Drill a hole 8mm deep in the centre
using a centre drill, followed by a 5mm
diameter drill.
Transfer the chuck to the milling
machine. Using a centre finder, locate
the centre of the 5mm hole. Drill the
eight holes, tapping the outer four for
M3 and countersinking the inner four
holes. Return to the lathe and use a
boring tool to enlarge the 5mm hole
siliconchip.com.au
Photo 1: the Timber Housing (base) with the Centring Insert
and stepper motor already inside it.
Photo 2: the timber Housing in the process of being
turned. Note how the raw timber has been cut into a
roughly octagonal shape to make turning it a bit easier.
to 22mm, as described above. Part off
and face the other side to a thickness
of 4mm
#2 Timber Housing
The critical dimensions of the Timber Housing are the diameter and
depth of the 64mm hole into which
the Centring Insert fits (see Fig.4). It
should fit tightly, and the top surface
should be a few thousandths of an inch
(about 0.1mm) below the bottom of the
120mm diameter hole.
Start with a 140 × 140 × 45mm pine
off-cut. To save time, cut off the corners to make it roughly octagonal, with
the inscribed circle having a diameter of about 140mm. Use six wood
screws and washers to mount the timber central on the lathe face plate (see
Photo 2). Turn the outside diameter to
135mm for a length of 35mm.
Drill a hole in the centre 35mm
deep using a centre drill, followed
by a 13mm drill. Fit a boring tool
and cut the 120mm diameter hole to
18.6mm deep (see Photo 3). Next, bore
out the hole for the Centring Insert as
described above. Use a 400-grit emery
cloth to smooth the surfaces.
Fit the Centring Insert (shown in
Photo 1) and, using a 2.5mm diameter
drill and the centring piece as a template, drill the four holes that hold it
in place. Next, enlarge the four holes
in the Housing to 3mm diameter.
Align the x/y coordinates of the
milling machine with the four mounting holes. Using a 3/8in or 10mm end
mill, cut out the rectangular clearance
hole for the stepper motor to a depth
of 12mm. Check that the stepper motor
clears the cutout.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.4: the Timber Housing forms the base of the Turntable with the stepper
motor inside. The stationary Rail Plate fits inside it and the Turntable part
rides on that. This diagram is shown at 75% of actual size. All cutting
diagrams will be available for download on the Silicon Chip website.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 45
Photo 3: at this stage of the turning, the timber Housing is
almost complete.
Fig.5: the Height Adjustment Spacer
fits between the Centring Insert and
Stationary Rail Plate. Its purpose is to
allow you to adjust the height of the
top of the Rail Platform to match the
height of the top edge of the Housing.
Photo 4: this shows the semi-rectangular recess in the
Housing underside, where the stepper motor is mounted.
While there, drill the 3.5mm clearance hole for the Rail Plate mounting
and the two ¼in (or 6.5mm) holes for
the rail power exit holes for the wires.
The latter two are elongated at an angle
using a round file. This makes it easier
to get the wires through in the assembly process.
Returning to the lathe, the next step
is to machine the rear of the Housing,
so it is the correct depth.
Use a three-jaw chuck fitted with
reverse jaws to hold the machined
side against the chuck face, so it runs
true. To prevent the timber from splitting when the jaws are expanded, fit
a pipe clamp around the perimeter of
the Housing (see Photo 4). Use a wood
saw to reduce the thickness to about
30mm. Face the end to the finished
thickness and clean up all the holes.
Using four M3 × 10mm screws and
shake-proof washers, fit the Centring
Insert into the Housing. Attach the stepper motor using four M3 × 6mm countersunk head screws – refer to Fig.1.
#3 Height Adjustment Spacer
Photo 5: the Rail Plate inside the
Timber Housing. Note that this was
taken before all the holes were
drilled.
46
Silicon Chip
The purpose of the Spacer (Fig.5) is
to allow you to adjust the height of the
Rail Platform relative to the top edge of
the Housing. I made mine from a piece
of scrap PCB material 1.6mm thick.
The Spacer is to eliminate any variation in material thickness and machining tolerances. You may have to experiment with its thickness or make it
out of several pieces to get the correct
height. You won’t know this until after
the final assembly.
#4 Rail Plate
The Rail Plate (Fig.6) is a slide fit
Australia's electronics magazine
into the Housing and, as the name suggests, it has a circular rail on its perimeter for the four support wheels to run
on – see Photo 5. These take the weight
of the locomotive as it moves onto the
Platform. It has grooves cut into the
underside for the rail power wires.
It is made from a piece of ¼in
(6.35mm) thick aluminium plate. To
save machining time, I used a hacksaw
to cut out a hexagonal piece inscribed
on a circle of about 124mm diameter.
To enable it to be mounted on the
face plate of the lathe for machining,
drill and tap four holes marked A as
shown in Fig.6. Depending on your
face plate size and shape, you may
have to move the position of these
holes. Drill a further 3mm hole in the
centre to centre the workpiece.
Mount it to the lathe using M4
machine screws and washers with a
piece of Masonite between the faceplate and workpiece, so it runs true.
Face the surface, then turn the outside diameter (approximately 120mm)
so that it is a slide fit in the Housing.
Enlarge the centre hole to 10mm
and then use a boring tool to reduce
the inside to a depth of 2.7mm and a
diameter of 109.6mm.
Change over to an RH tool and
reduce the outside depth by 2.7mm
so that you end up with a rail width
of 1.2mm. Using emery cloth, slightly
round the top edges of the rail and
smooth the Rail Plate surface.
The rear of the Rail Plate now has to
be machined to size. Remove the plate
from the face-plate and remount it so
its rear is facing away from the chuck.
As you are only facing the surface, it
is not essential to set it running true.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.6: the Rail Plate fits inside
the Timber Housing and is the
stationary part, with the Turntable
assembly riding on it by the Wheel
Assemblies.
Holes A are temporary holes used
to fix the job to the face plate
when machining. They are 3.3mm
diameter tapped to M4 and spaced
30° from horizontal on a 40mm
radius from centre.
Fig.7: the
Locating Pins
keep the Contact
PCB stationary,
locked to the Rail
Plate while the
Turntable rotates
above it.
Reduce the plate width so that the
dimension between the bottom of the
rail and the back of the plate is 3.3mm.
Remove the job and transfer it to
the milling machine to drill the holes
and cut the grooves for the wires on
the bottom. To centre the job, I turned
a piece of scrap aluminium into a disc
that was a slide fit in the 10mm hole
in the centre of the Rail Plate. I drilled
a 5mm hole in the centre of the disc. I
then clamped the job down and using
precision drilling, bored and tapped
holes as shown in the drawing.
I loosely clamped the job onto the
base of the milling machine and, with a
centre finder in the drill chuck, moved
the job until the centre finder moved
true. I then clamped the job down and,
using precision drilling, bored out the
holes. Finally, I used a 1/8in (3.2mm)
diameter slot drill to cut the grooves
for the wires.
Now make and fit the Locating Pins
siliconchip.com.au
for the PCB – see Fig.7. Cut two 4.6mm
lengths of 1.5mm diameter brass rod.
Clean the ends up using the lathe,
then use Loctite 620 to glue them in
place into the Rail Plate, in the holes
marked F.
The last job is to fill the four 4mm
holes that were used to mount the job
in the machining process. I made a
piece of threaded M4 aluminium rod
and chopped it up into four 3.5mm
lengths. I applied Loctite 620, fitted
them in the holes and ground off the
excess material.
#5 Spring Tension Spacer
This is a small washer made of
0.25mm card that is placed under the
PCB (see Fig.2). This increases the
height of the PCB and hence the tension in the contact.
#6 Contact PCB
This will be available as a gold-plated
Australia's electronics magazine
Fig.8: the gold-plated Contact PCB is
responsible for transferring power
from the stationary Housing to the
rotating Turntable above. The springloaded pins moving on its tracks
reverse the polarity of the power to
the rails as it passes through 90°.
March 2023 47
Photo 6 (below): the Contact PCB used
in the prototype is not gold-plated like
the commercial version we’re making
available, but it does the same job of
transferring power to the rails.
Photo 7 (right): this photo shows the Girder and Wheels attached to the Rail Platform along with the Insulator, springloaded pins and wires connecting the rails to those pins. You can also see where the Fence Posts are glued into holes along
either side of the Rail Platform.
PCB coded 09103232 (see Fig.8). It is
held in place by the brass pins in the
Rail Plate and the tension of the springloaded pins.
#7 Girder
This is made from a 118mm length of
rectangular aluminium extrusion, 30 ×
15 × 2mm (see Photo 7). You can purchase this from Bunnings in one-metre
lengths. Take some time to locate the
exact centre, then use a centre drill to
drill a hole there, followed by the hole
sizes shown in Fig.9. Precision drill all
the holes on the top surface.
Next, tap the two 1.4mm holes at
the ends with 10BA threads. Note that
two of the 2.3mm diameter holes are
countersunk.
The next step is to mill the sloping sides. To save milling time, use a
hack saw to remove as much material
as possible. Mount the 15mm sides
between the jaws of the vice on the
milling machine. Rotate the vice 3°
and, using a long series end mill, cut
the taper at one end until the desired
thickness is reached. Repeat for the
other end. Mill the thickness to the
correct size.
#8 Centring Bush
As this part is a slide fit into the
Girder, you should make it after the
Girder is completed. Chuck a piece of
12mm diameter brass rod and reduce
the outside diameter to 10mm for an
8mm length.
For 1.9mm from the end, further
reduce the outer diameter so that it is
a slide fit into the 7.5mm hole in the
centre of the Girder (see Fig.10).
Using a centre drill, followed by a
5mm drill, bore a hole into the end for
Fig.9: the Girder sits under the Rail Platform, strengthening it so that it doesn’t
flex when the locomotive is driven onto the rails above.
48
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
8mm. Part off the piece to a finished
length of 7.9mm. Transfer the part to
the drill press, then drill and tap the
hole for the 2.5 × 3mm grub screw.
After that, fit the grub screw.
The last operation is to glue the
Bush into the Girder using Loctite 620
in the 7.5mm hole and drill the Allen
key access hole for the grub screw.
From the drawing, mark where the
Allen key access hole should be. Insert
the Bush in place and check that the
tapped hole in its side lines up with
the marked hole. When correct, drill
the 1.8mm hole.
When gluing it in place, make sure
that the Bush is in the correct location
by inserting an Allen key into the hole
so that it fits into the grub screw and is
at right angles to the side of the Girder.
#9 Insulator
This is made from a 38 × 25mm piece
of blank PCB material (see Fig.11; FR4
fibreglass laminate). Locate the centre
of the PCB and use precision drilling
to drill the seven holes. Start each hole
with a centre drill. The imperial drill
size for the 3.97mm hole is 5/32in;
the spring-loaded pins are a push-fit
Fig.10: the
Centring
Bush ensures
that the Rail
Platform
rotates evenly
about its
centre on the
stepper motor
shaft.
siliconchip.com.au
Photo 8: this shows how the Wheel Assemblies are mounted to the bottom of the
Rail Platform. Ensure they’re angled correctly so the platform rotates smoothly
about its centre.
Fig.11: the Insulator prevents the pins
carrying current to the train tracks
from shorting onto the Rail Platform.
into them (4mm is close enough if you
don’t have a 5/32in drill).
(1.6mm) thick sheet of aluminium (see
Fig.13). Cut out a piece 50 × 118mm.
Find the centre and inscribe a 59mm
radius. Using a linisher, cut out the
inscribed curved ends. Precision-drill
all the holes, remembering that, except
for the 2mm diameter holes, they must
align with the Girder holes as shown
in Fig.9.
Countersink the six marked holes
and clean off any burrs using emery
cloth.
#10 Wheel Assemblies
The four wheels each consist of
three parts: the wheel, the axle and the
Housing (see Fig.12 & Photo 8). The
wheels are made from ½in brass round
bar stock. Face the end and turn the
outside diameter to 7.9mm for 3mm.
Use a centre drill followed by a 1mm
drill to bore out the hole for the axle.
Part off for a length of 2mm. Repeat
for the other three wheels.
For the axles, cut off four 7mm
lengths of 1mm diameter brass rod.
Clean up the ends in the lathe.
The wheel housings are a bit more
complicated. As I had to make four
of these to the same accurate size, I
first milled out a 70mm length of 5
× 7.5mm rectangular aluminium bar.
I then mounted it in the vice with
the 7.5mm side horizontal and then,
using a 3/32in (2.4mm) slitting saw
mounted in the chuck, cut the wheel
slot 6.7mm deep.
Next, I drilled the hole for the axle
using a centre drill followed by a 1mm
drill. I rotated the job so that the 5mm
side was horizontal, then drilled and
tapped the 1.8mm hole with an 8BA
thread. The distance between this hole
and the axle hole should be precisely
6.4mm. Cut off to length and create the
2.5mm radius using a linisher. Repeat
for the other three housings.
Fit the wheels and axles and, using
a dob of Loctite Extreme Glue Gel
(available from Bunnings), lock the
axles in place.
#11 Rail Platform
The Platform is made from a 1/16in
#12 Fence
First, you need to cut 14 Posts
17.8mm in length from hollow 1/16in
(1.6mm) square rod, as shown in
Fig.14. Once cut, clean any burrs
from the ends. Next, use the drilling
machine at high speed to drill the holes
for the wires to go through (see Fig.15).
Again, clean off any burrs.
Fig.12: these pieces make up the
Wheel Assemblies that allow the
rotating Rail Platform to ride on the
Rail Plate.
Fig.13: the Rail Platform is the rotating
part of the Turntable that the train tracks
are mounted to. Fences are fitted on
either side to make it look realistic.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 49
Fig.14: these
Posts are the
vertical parts
of the fences on
either side of
the train tracks.
To make the rails for the Fence, cut
four 100mm lengths of 0.5mm diameter brass rod. Insert the Posts into the
Rail Plate and thread the 0.5mm rails
through the Posts on both sides. Use
Loctite Extreme Glue Gel to set the
Posts and wires.
#13 Rails/Tracks
The locomotive rails are made from
a length of R600 Hornby rail. Reduce
the rail length by removing an equal
amount from each end so the final
length, as shown in the drawing, is
117mm. Clean up the cuts with emery
cloth.
Check that the existing 1.4mm holes
are 90.4mm apart, then enlarge them
to 1.8mm. As mentioned earlier, four
2.5mm grub screws should be inserted
in the ends of the rail sleepers to adjust
their final height. So drill four 2mm
diameter holes in the sleepers, as
shown in Fig.16, and tap them 2.5mm.
Finally, to enable electrical contact
Photo 9: The painted top side of the Rail Platform with the rails and Fences
attached. Everything is painted matte black except for the rails, so that power
can be transferred to the model locomotive.
to be made to the rails, carefully
remove the plastic shown in red in
Fig.16.
#14 Painting
I sprayed the Rail Platform with
two coats of black Rust-oleum Ultra
Matte (available from Bunnings). At
the same time, I sprayed the heads of
six of the 8BA × ¼in screws and the
sides of the Girder. I sprayed the top
and inside edge of the timber Housing
with rust-coloured paint.
Mask the edge of the Rail Plate and
spray its top with a couple of coats of
Riviera Grey Dulux Duramax Chalky
Finish. When dry, use emery cloth
Fig.15: here’s how the Fences are mounted on either side of the Rail Platform.
Fig.16: the rails/tracks come pre-made but you need to make some
modifications. After cutting them to length, some holes need to be added, others
enlarged and a couple of pieces of the plastic insulation cut away so the springloaded pins can make contact with the conductive tracks.
50
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
to remove the paint from the top of
the rail.
#15 Control electronics
The chosen stepper motor is a bipolar type rated at 1A per phase and 200
steps. As mentioned earlier, we need to
operate it in 1/8th step mode to achieve
sufficient accuracy. The Allegro A3967
IC is ideal for the task and provides
additional inputs to reverse the motor,
regulate the motor drive current and
has a 5V DC regulated output to power
the driver microprocessor.
When I went to purchase the A3967
IC, I found it much cheaper to buy it
mounted on a small module named
“Easy Driver stepper motor driver”.
This also has the advantage that you
don’t have to solder surface-mount
components.
The circuit diagram, Fig.17, shows
that the module has four outputs to
connect the two windings of the stepper motor. Two other inputs, MS1 and
MS2, determine the number of steps
per positive going pulse on the step
input according to Table 1.
As we want 1/8th steps, we leave
those terminals unconnected and
allow the internal pull-up resistors to
keep them high. An enable input turns
the driver on when low and off when
it is high. Finally, if you ground the
direction input, the motor will turn in
the opposite direction.
To turn the motor through 360°
with the Full Step setting, we need to
apply 200 pulses. In our case, we only
want it to rotate through 180°, but as
we are using it in the 1/8th step setting,
we will need to apply 800 pulses on
the step input.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.17: most of the circuitry in the control module is within the Easy Driver stepper motor driving module (yellow shaded
box). IC1 sends it signals when pushbutton S1 is pressed to rotate the platform by 180°.
The pulse width and the delay
between each pulse determine the
Turntable rotation time. We are using
a PIC12F675 microcontroller to generate the pulses. Its GP2 input (pin 5)
is set to interrupt the microprocessor
when it goes low, ie, when you press
pushbutton S1. The 100nF capacitor
from that pin to ground eliminates any
contact bounce.
The interrupt routine causes digital
output GP1 (pin 6) to go low, enabling
the motor, and produces 800 positive
siliconchip.com.au
pulses from the GP0 digital output (pin
7) that step the motor through 180°. At
the end of the routine, GP1 goes high
again, disabling the stepper motor.
#16 PCB assembly
The circuit is built on a 56 × 51mm
PCB coded 09103231 that the Easy
Driver module is mounted on, shown
in Fig.18. Header pins are used to make
the wire connections to the power supply, pushbutton and stepper motor.
Start by fitting the male header pins
Australia's electronics magazine
(not the ones for the Easy Driver), the
8-pin IC socket, and the capacitors.
Of the capacitors, only the 100µF
type is polarised; its longer lead must
Table 1 – steps per input pulse
MS1
MS2
Resolution
low
low
Full Step (two-phase)
high
low
Half step
low
high
Quarter step
high
high
Eighth step
March 2023 51
be soldered to the right-hand pad
labelled “+”. The IC socket should
also be installed the right way around,
with its notch to the left. The reason
for the IC socket is so that, if we wish
to change the program, we can remove
the microcontroller and reprogram it.
Now add the resistors; they are
mounted vertically. The wire link can
be made from a leftover resistor wire
off-cut; however, if you purchase the
PCB from Silicon Chip, it will be a
double-sided board, so the wire link
is not needed.
Fit the PIC12F675 microprocessor in
the socket. If you have purchased this
from the Silicon Chip Online Shop, it
will already have the firmware loaded.
If you wish to do this yourself, you can
download the files from the Silicon
Chip website.
To enable the Easy Driver module to be removed, it is socketed. Cut
apart the socket strip into five pairs
of pins, one three-pin strip and one
four-pin strip and solder them to the
positions that will be under the Easy
Driver. Insert matching male header
pins into the sockets, drop the Easy
Driver module on top, ensuring all
the pins go into its pads, then solder
them in place.
#17 wiring & testing
Check the PCB for solder bridges
and dry joints, then wire up the 12V
DC socket, stepper motor and the
normally-open pushbutton switch, as
shown in Fig.18. The other connections are not used.
Before switching on the power,
double-check the power supply polarity connections. The Easy Driver and
PIC could be destroyed if they are
the wrong way around. Temporarily
remove IC1 from its socket.
Switch on the power, and the LED
on the Easy Driver module should
glow. Use a voltmeter to check that you
have 5V between pins 1 & 8 of IC1. If
it’s OK, switch off the power, wait for
the capacitors to discharge, then plug
IC1 back into its socket.
Next, set the current limit by powering it back up and adjusting the trimpot on the Easy Driver so that there
is +4.2V between TP1 and ground.
Then press the pushbutton, and you
should see the stepper motor shaft
rotated through 180°. Press it again,
and the shaft should return to its original position.
The Easy Driver board has two pairs
of shorting pads on it. The first, if
closed, reduces the output voltage to
3.3V, while the second enables the 5V
output. When supplied, the first link is
usually open but the second is closed.
If you aren’t getting 5V out of it, check
that both are set correctly.
The circuit diagram and documentation for the Easy Driver are available at
www.schmalzhaus.com/EasyDriver/
#18 mechanical assembly
Attach the Insulator with the
spring-loaded pins to the underside
of the Girder using two unpainted
8BA x ¼in screws and nuts. Next,
place the Rail Platform on top of the
Girder. Use two painted 8BA × ¼in
screws and nuts to join them together.
Solder 50mm lengths of hook-up
wire to the bottom of each rail (where
you removed the plastic), ensuring that
the wire insulation goes all the way up
to the solder joints. Place the rail over
the Rail Platform assembly and insert
the wires through the holes marked
“D” in the Rail Platform and the Girder.
Fit the two 10BA × 3/8in screws, but
leave them finger-tight at this stage.
Solder the wires to the spring-loaded
pins, leaving slack, as shown in Photo
7. Attach the Wheel Assemblies to the
Rail Platform using the four remaining
painted 8BA screws.
The stepper motor, Centring Bush
and Housing can now all be assembled as in Photo 1. Fit the Spacer over
the stepper motor shaft, followed by
the Rail Plate. Use 16mm M3 screws
plus extra washers to fit the Rail Plate
so that the end of the screws are flush
with the plate.
The next task is to get power to the
Contact PCB. Cut two 300mm lengths
of good-quality hook-up wire of different colours and strip away about
3mm of insulation from one end of
each wire. Tin the ends and insert the
wires into the board from the component side and solder them in place.
Use as little solder as possible, as we
don’t want any solder on the springloaded contact pins tracks on the PCB.
Hold the PCB with the copper side
up and feed the wires through the
grooves and holes until they exit from
the bottom of the Housing. Using a
marking pen, place a mark on the edge
of the Rail Plate that can be seen from
the top, as shown in Fig.6. This mark
Fig.18: both the PCB assembly and wiring are straightforward, as
shown here. IC1 and the Easy Driver module are both socketed to
make replacement and reprogramming (of IC1) simpler.
52
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
will be used later in positioning the
Turntable in the final layout.
The PCB should now be flat on the
Rail Plate and held in place by the
two Locating Pins. Strip the ends of
the wires and, using an ohmmeter,
check that there aren’t any shorts to
the Rail Plate.
Loosen the grub screw in the Rail
Plate assembly and slide it over the
stepper motor shaft. Loosen the screws
on the Wheel Assembly to adjust their
angles so that the wheels align with
the track on the Rail Plate. Re-tighten
the screws.
Push it all the way down until the
wheels make contact with the Rail
Plate and note how much the springloaded contact pins compress. Ideally,
this should be about 1mm. If it is less
than 1mm, this can be increased by
adding the Spring Tension Spacer, a
small washer about 20mm in diameter
with an 8mm hole in the centre made
from 0.25mm card. It is placed under
the Contact PCB.
Next, check the level of the bottom
of the rails in relation to the Housing
side. If it is too low, you can adjust the
height by increasing the thickness of
the Height Adjustment Spacer. If all
is well, tighten the 2.5mm grub screw
in the Bush.
You should now be able to rotate the
Rail Plate assembly freely using your
fingers. Connect an ohmmeter to one
rail and the other end to one of the
wires protruding from the base. Now
rotate the Rail Plate assembly; depending on its position, it will either be a
short circuit or open-circuit. Do the
same for the other rail.
#19 homing the stepper motor
When you apply power to the circuit (with S1 not pressed), the motor
windings receive power for a short
time, causing the stepper (rail bridge
assembly) to lock in one position. If
you rotate the rail bridge less than 7.2°
in either direction, on switching the
power off and on, the rail bridge will
return to the original position.
There are 50 positions 7.2° apart at
which the motor will lock in place. We
need to pick one of these for the point
at which the Turntable track and the
train entry tracks align. This way, the
bridge and entry tracks will be aligned
when you switch the power on.
#20 final set-up
My layout is built on polyurethane
siliconchip.com.au
Parts List – Model Railway Turntable
1 12V DC 500mA+ plugpack
1 17HS08-1004S 1A 16Ncm stepper motor [eBay]
1 gold-plated Contact PCB coded 09103232, 29 × 29mm
1 assembled control module (see Fig.18)
1 chassis-mounting DC barrel socket (to suit plugpack)
various lengths and colours of medium-duty hook-up wire
Fasteners
2 M3 × 16mm Phillips panhead machine screws
4 M3 × 10mm Phillips head machine screws
4 M3 × 6mm countersunk head machine screws
6 M3 shakeproof washers
5 M2.5 × 3mm grub screws
8 8BA × ¼in countersunk screws [E & J Winter ]
4 8BA nuts [E & J Winter ]
2 10BA × ⅜in hex head bolts [E & J Winter ]
Other hardware
2 Mill Max 0861015208214110 spring-loaded contacts
[element14 2751176]
1 70 × 70mm × 1.6mm piece of copper-laminated FR4 (unetched clad PCB)
1 25 × 28mm × 1.6mm blank FR4 laminate (unclad PCB)
1 Hornby R600 rail [K&S Metals]
1 round aluminium bar, 65mm diameter, 15mm long
1 140mm × 140mm × 45mm piece of pine
1 125mm × 125mm × 6.35mm aluminium plate
1 120mm length of 30mm × 15mm × 2mm hollow rectangular extruded
aluminium tube [Bunnings 1130544]
1 30mm length of ½in diameter brass round bar
1 35mm length of 1mm diameter brass round bar [K&S Metals]
1 10mm length of 1.5mm diameter brass round bar [K&S Metals]
1 70mm length of 12mm × 12mm square aluminium bar
1 300mm length of hollow 1/16in square brass bar [K&S Metals]
1 400mm length of 0.5mm diameter brass round bar [K&S Metals]
1 20 × 20mm piece of 0.25mm-thick card
1 small container of Loctite Extreme Glue No Drip Gel [Bunnings 0273717]
1 small container of Loctite 620 retaining compound
[AIMS Industrial A0116625]
1 spray can of Rust-oleum Ultra Matte black paint [Bunnings 0197886]
1 spray can of Duramax Rust Effect Spray Paint or similar
[Bunnings 0195384]
1 spray can of Dulux Duramax Chalky Finish Riviera Grey paint
[Bunnings 1400964]
or another specialised fastener supplier
Control module parts
1 single-sided or double-sided PCB coded 09103231, 56 × 51mm
1 Easy Driver stepper motor driver [Core Electronics ROB-12779]
1 PIC12F675-I/P 8-bit microcontroller programmed with 0910323A.HEX,
DIP-8 (IC1)
1 8-pin DIL IC socket
1 SPST miniature pushbutton switch [Jaycar SP0710]
1 40-pin header, 2.54mm pitch [Jaycar HM3212]
1 40-pin female header, 2.54mm pitch [Jaycar HM3230]
1 100μF 16V radial electrolytic capacitor
2 100nF 50V ceramic, MKT or multi-layer ceramic capacitors
2 10kW 1% ¼W axial resistors
3 6.8kW 1% ¼W axial resistors
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 53
Fig.19: you need to ensure the tracks are aligned vertically and
horizontally between the fixed and rotating sections before using
the Turntable and that the wiring polarity is correct, so there is no
voltage between the co-linear track sections.
sheets, so all I had to do was cut a hole
the same diameter as the Housing for
the Turntable to fit in. The same would
apply to layouts built of other materials. The centre of the hole should lie
on the projection of the centre line of
the entry track at a distance of 59.6mm
from the end of the entry track.
Fit the Turntable so that the top of
the Housing is flush with the surface
of the layout and the middle of the
external track entry is roughly in line
with the mark you previously placed
on the Rail Plate. Switch the power on
and off to find the homing position of
the Turntable track. Once found, rotate
the Turntable so the entry track lines
up with the Turntable track.
Switch the power on and press the
rotate push button. If all is well, the
other end of the Turntable track should
align with the entry track. If not, the
Turntable track isn’t aligned exactly in
the centre of rotation. You can correct
this by elongating the 1.8mm holes
for the 10BA screws, allowing you to
slightly move the position of the Turntable track on the rail bridge.
The last job before tightening the
10BA screws is to adjust the height
of the ends of the Turntable track to
match those of the entry track. We
now need to connect the train controller power to the Turntable track. If it
is the wrong way around, the power
supply will be shorted out when the
engine wheels hit the Turntable track.
With no engine on the track, connect the Turntable to the power supply so that there isn’t any voltage
between the connecting tracks, as
shown in Fig.19.
#21 operation
Switch the power on and use your
train controller to shunt the engine
slowly onto the Turntable. Press the
rotate button, and when the table stops
rotating, back the engine out.
SC
54
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
PRODUCT SHOWCASE
Electronex arrives in Melbourne this May
Electronex, the electronics design
and assembly expo returns to the Melbourne Convention and Exhibition
Centre on the 10-11th of May 2023.
Electronex is Australia’s pre-
eminent exhibition for companies
using electronics in design, assembly,
manufacture and service in Australia.
The SMCBA Electronics Design and
Manufacture Conference will also be
held, featuring technical workshops
from international and local experts.
In an exciting new development,
Electronex will be co-located with
Australian Manufacturing Week, with
trade visitors now able to visit both
events on Wednesday or Thursday.
This allows visitors to see the entire
spectrum of the latest products, technology and turnkey solutions for the
electronics and manufacturing sectors.
Attending this event is a must for
designers, engineers, managers and
other decision-
makers involved in
designing or manufacturing products
that utilise electronics.
The expo will showcase a wide
range of electronic components, surface mount and inspection equipment,
test and measurement and other products and services.
Companies can also discuss their
specific requirements with contract
manufacturers that can design and
produce turnkey solutions. Register
to attend for free at www.electronex.
com.au
Australasian Exhibitions
and Events Pty Ltd
Suite 11, Pier 35-263 Lorimer St
Port Melbourne VIC 3207
Tel: (03) 9676 2133
mail: ngray<at>auexhibitions.com.au
Web: www.auexhibitions.com.au
Nordic Semiconductors new nRF7002 companion IC for WiFi 6
The nRF7002 is a low-power WiFi
6 companion IC providing seamless
dual-band connectivity (2.4 & 5GHz).
The nRF7002 can be used together
with Nordic’s nRF52 & nRF53 series
multi-protocol SoCs and the nRF9160
cellular IoT SiP (LTE-M/NB-IoT) . But
it also can be used in conjunction with
non-Nordic host devices.
The nRF7002 brings low power and
secure WiFi to the IoT sphere. The
dual-band IC complies with Station
(STA), Soft Access
Point (AP), and
WiFi direct operation, and meets the
IEEE 802.11b, a, g,
n (“Wi-Fi 4”), ac (“5”), and ax (“6”)
standards.
It also works with Bluetooth LE,
Thread, and Zigbee. The nRF7002 supports Target Wake Time (TWT), a key
WiFi 6 power saving feature. Interfacing with a host processor is done via
SPI or Quad SPI. The IC offers a single
spatial stream, 20MHz channel bandwidth, 64 QAM (MCS7), OFDMA, up
to 86Mbps PHY throughput, and BSS
coloring.
The nRF7002 is the ideal choice for
implementing low power SSID-based
WiFi locationing when used together
with the nRF9160 and nRF Cloud
Location Services.
This is all supported by the devel-
opment kit. The dev kit includes an
nRF7002 IC and features an nRF5340
multi-protocol SoC as a host processor. The nRF5340 embeds a 128MHz
Arm Cortex-M33 application processor and a 64MHz network processor.
The dev kit includes: Arduino connectors; two programmable buttons; a
WiFi dual-band antenna and a Bluetooth LE antenna, and current measurement pins.
The nRF7002 companion IC and
dev kit are available now from Nordic’s distribution partners.
Nordic Semiconductors
www.nordicsemi.com
High current inductor for automotive applications
Würth Elektronik introduces
another AEC-Q200 certified SMD
inductor: the WE-XHMA. It features
an extremely high current capability of
up to 50.6A saturation current and the
ability to handle high current transient
peaks. Its design with a flat wire coil
and composite core material ensures
low copper losses and stable behavior
under temperature fluctuations.
siliconchip.com.au
The WE-XHMA is particularly suitable for use in DC/DC converters for
high current supply and FPGAs, as
well as filter applications. In contrast to conventional core materials,
the compact coil shows hardly any
temperature-dependent fluctuations
in terms of inductance and saturation current.
The higher energy density and the
compact design make it useful for
switch-mode power supplies. Furthermore, it shows a lower skin effect at
higher frequencies and the heat dissipation towards the circuit board is also
Australia's electronics magazine
better than round wire. The compact
molded magnetically shielded coils
have an operating temperature range
of -40°C to +125°C.
The WE-XHMA is available in SMT
styles: 6030, 6060, 8080, 1090 and
1510. You can also choose between
saturation currents from 9.3 to 50.6A.
Free samples for developers are provided.
Würth Elektronik
Max-Eyth-Straße 1
74638 Waldenburg Germany
www.we-online.com
March 2023 55
Altium
Designer 23
Review by Tim Blythman
Altium Designer 23 is the latest version of Altium’s EDA (electronics design automation)
software, released in December 2022. Since we use Altium Designer practically daily to draw
circuit diagrams and lay out PCBs, we were keen to see what new features have been added.
W
e have used Altium Designer to create PCBs for projects for many
years, counting back around 30 years
if you include its predecessor, Protel
Autotrax.
You can still download Autotrax
from the Altium website (www.altium.
com/documentation/other_installers),
although you will likely need a DOS
emulator such as DOSBox to run it.
Of course, it has evolved a lot since
then. Sometimes the yearly updates
are ‘revolutionary’ while others
are ‘evolutionary’. While the latest
updates are more in the latter category,
several of the new features are very
handy, and we will certainly be using
them. Other changes streamline the
workflow for existing features, which
is always welcome.
Previous versions of Altium Designer
have seen substantial improvements,
including complete code rewrites of
the Schematic Editor (AD20) and PCB
Editor (AD18), as well as integration
with the Altium 365 cloud tool.
Our last ECAD review was of Altium
Designer 22 in the June issue last year
(siliconchip.au/Article/15348). That
built on our review of Altium 365 and
Altium Designer 21 from January 2021
(siliconchip.au/Article/14705).
Altium 365 is Altium’s ‘cloud’ tool
which can be used on its own through
a browser and is also integrated into
versions of Altium Designer from
Altium Designer 20 onward.
Most of the features of Altium
Designer are only available to paid
subscribers, but this review also mentions some free online tools.
For example, Altium 365 has a free
online file viewer at www.altium.com/
viewer/ and you can register for a free
Altium account to access the features
of Altium 365 Basic.
Altium Designer is used widely in
industry by companies who design
much more complex and exacting
designs than us; many new features,
past and present, are aimed at such
companies. Still, some new features
are just as valuable for small organisations like Silicon Chip.
This review is of Altium Designer
version 23.0.01; you might see even
more updates and features if you use a
later version. A minor version update
appears about once per month.
We shall now look at some of the
improvements in AD23, describing
them one by one.
Gerber export
Screen 1: the new Gerber Setup page places all the essential settings on a single
tab. It is much simpler to use than the older version, which has five different tabs.
56
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
Gerber files (also known as RS-274X)
are sent to PCB manufacturers for
making the actual PCBs. So the correct specifications and units (!) must
be used when generating these files.
A new version of Altium Designer’s
Gerber file generation dialog box is now
available, shown in Screen 1. This was
enabled by default on our installation
of Altium Designer 23, but appears to
siliconchip.com.au
have become available earlier in 2022.
This is a much simpler and more succinct view than the older dialog box,
which had five tabs and many selections we used sparingly, if at all. From
now on, we will be using the newer
dialog box for our Gerber file exports.
If it is not enabled, you can change
that by ticking the UI.Unification.GerberDialog setting under Advanced
options on the System → General page
of the Preferences dialog box.
Screen 2: file
comparisons can
be made from
this window
by selecting
two different
files, including
schematic,
PCB, Gerber
and BOM files.
Here we chose
two different
versions of the
same project
PCB.
File comparison
Altium Designer 23 introduces a File
Comparison tool that can work with
schematics, PCBs, Gerber files and
BOMs (bills of materials). Since we
occasionally need to update designs
to account for errors, improvements
and even alternative parts, seeing the
differences between file versions can
be extremely useful.
In the past, we often had to resort
to a ‘flicker test’, rapidly switching
between the two files so that our eyes
could pick out the differences. That
relies on aligning them properly and
fast switching, and is error-prone, so
thank goodness we won’t have to do
that anymore!
The option is found under the Project → Show Differences menu item and
the dialog box, seen in Screen 2, allows
two files to be chosen for comparison.
Screen 3 shows two versions of our
Advanced SMD Test Tweezers PCB
with the differences listed at left and
highlighted on the right. In this case,
we moved a header slightly between
the two versions.
Clicking on the listed items highlights them in the PCB view. Besides
comparing different revisions, such a
tool could also be handy for reverse-
engineering or recreating a design.
If you have online access to projects via Altium 365, you can perform
a file comparison via a project’s History in the browser interface, as shown
in Screen 4.
There’s even a version of the tool
that does not require an Altium
account, although it only works for
Gerber files. It can be found on the web
at www.altium.com/gerber-compare/
(output shown in Screen 5).
Screen 3:
when two files
are compared,
their
differences are
listed on the
left and shown
graphically
at right, by
highlighting
the component
or track that
varies.
Design Reuse Blocks
A Reuse Block is a circuit snippet
that can be added as though it were a
component. At first glance, a Reuse
Block seems like a module, and in
siliconchip.com.au
Screen 4: Altium 365 also allows projects to be compared over their history. A
commit (file version) can be selected, and individual files can be compared with
other versions, as seen here.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 57
Screen 5: Gerber files can be compared with the free online tool at www.altium.
com/gerber-compare/ This shows two versions of the Advanced SMD Test
Tweezers, with red and green colour coding for the differences.
Screen 6: to try out the Design Reuse Blocks feature, we created this block
consisting of a microcontroller and a handful of passive components. The circuit
snippet can now be placed in either a schematic or PCB file and added as needed.
many cases, could be interchangeable.
Reuse Blocks can be accessed from
the Design Reuse panel (from the Panels button). Crucially, it can consist of a
schematic document and a PCB document, but it doesn’t need to have both.
As the name suggests, it is a document snippet that could be used in
multiple projects. The standard workflow is to lay out the schematic, including wiring, then lay out and route the
PCB block. It can then be placed as a
‘component’ from the Design Reuse
panel.
One scenario where this would
come in handy is if a part of a circuit
is subject to specific routing requirements due to speed or RF emissions.
This routing becomes part of the Reuse
Block. Or you may want to build a
six-channel amplifier, in which case
you can design one channel and then
place it six times. Updating the original will affect all six channels.
Once you have created and used a
block, you can easily drop it into other
designs where the remainder of the circuit can be routed around the existing
embedded routing. This is also a way
to reuse known-good designs with
minimal testing and validation.
The schematic module can be
placed as a group of components, as
it would appear on the schematic, or
as a ‘black box’ module, where connections can be made to named ports.
58
Silicon Chip
Such a block can be created by copying and pasting part of an existing
design (schematic, PCB file or both)
or made from scratch.
Screen 6 shows a Reuse Block that
we created. This consists of a microcontroller and its essential passive
devices; the routing creates a compact
unit that can be built on.
This feature would be convenient if
you are doing a lot of similar designs
with common building blocks. It also
simplifies using a common inventory,
as the same components are guaranteed to be used in the blocks.
A Reuse Block can also be saved
into the Altium 365 cloud to be made
accessible across larger teams.
Pin functionality
This feature will be especially
handy for those who often work with
microcontrollers but could apply to
other components too. As you might
realise from our recent microcontroller
reviews, such as in the October 2022
issue (siliconchip.au/Article/15505),
those parts are becoming more powerful and versatile.
In particular, more peripheral features are being added, and these features are often available on many pins.
Conversely, each pin on a microcontroller usually has many possible functions. Parts like the PIC16F18146 allow
any of the many digital peripherals to
Australia's electronics magazine
◀
be mapped to any of a group of 17 pins.
You’ll often see on our schematics
the numerous roles assigned to various pins, which may include multiple functions. For example, one of
the pins used for programming may
have a different function during regular operation, when a programmer is
not connected.
Depending on the chip, it can be
quite an art to juggle the available
peripherals between the pins that are
available for multiplexing, especially
when considering the PCB routing.
The Pin Functionality feature of
Altium Designer 23 allows the pins
to be labelled with the function that
is actually used in a particular application. This can be helpful in several
ways.
Firstly, each pin can be associated
with a list of functions it can provide. This will allow those involved
with ‘schematic capture’ (drawing up
circuit diagrams) to ensure that the
correct pins are used for the correct
purpose.
For example, if the list included the
‘SDA’ function, you would know that
the pin could be used for the data line
of an I2C bus. If there is a pin on that
data bus lacking this function, that
could indicate a mistake.
Screen 7 shows how you can edit
the pin functions. This dialog box can
be found using the Edit option on the
siliconchip.com.au
Screen 7: pin
functionality
can now be
edited from
the Pins tab of
a component’s
Properties in
the schematic
editor.
Multiple
functions can
be added to
each pin of a
device.
◀
Pins tab of a component’s Properties
panel. This can be done from within
the schematic document itself and
does not require making changes to
the schematic library, although you
can do it that way too.
Secondly, the functions that are
actually displayed on the schematic
can be selected from a drop-down
menu. Any number of the functions
can be chosen for display, matching
the specific use in that project.
This can also be handy for some ‘bitbanged’ peripherals, where a peripheral feature (for example, I2C or SPI)
is performed by general-purpose I/O
operations in software instead of via a
dedicated hardware peripheral.
Just about any pin can be used in
such a case, and the function will not
be fixed to that pin, so it would not
usually be labelled with that function.
Still, it can easily be added.
Once a schematic has been ‘wired
up’, the functions in use (of the many
available) are selected for display. This
will make it apparent to those writing the firmware what pin peripheral
siliconchip.com.au
Screen 8: once added, Pin functions
can be selected in a schematic from
a drop-down menu. This means that
only the specific pin functions that are
used are displayed.
configuration is needed. Notably, only
a small number of functions usually
need to be displayed, meaning the
schematic is less cluttered.
Screen 8 shows the drop-down
menu that alters the displayed pin
functions. Some or all of the functions
of that pin can be chosen as needed.
PCB Health Check
Altium Designer 23 also adds the
ability to run a PCB Health Check.
This is distinct from the Design Rules,
which dictate whether the PCB is consistent with the fabrication rules set in
accordance with (among other things)
the PCB manufacturer’s requirements.
The PCB Health Check is more
aligned with aspects that may pass
a design check but are functionally
impractical or incorrect. For example,
a component rotation of 360° is usually indistinguishable from one with a
0° rotation, but this might cause problems for an external MCAD (mechanical computer-aided design) program
– see below.
Other examples include zero-width
Australia's electronics magazine
Screen 9: PCB Health Check is
found in the Properties panel when
no objects are selected in the PCB
Editor. It will highlight issues that
might cause problems beyond those
specified by Design Rules.
March 2023 59
lines and zero-area regions, which may
not be interpreted correctly after being
exported into Gerber files. Such objects
can be hard to find manually, since
they are essentially invisible.
The PCB Health Check is available
from the Properties panel within the
PCB editor anytime there is no object
selected. You can see a typical report
in Screen 9.
From the top, there is a summary of
all checks, a list of reported issues for
each category and a brief explanation
of the nature of the issue and how it
might be fixed. Some can even be corrected automatically.
We don’t think we’ve ever run into
these sorts of defects. Still, those working with large designs (especially if
created by a team) will undoubtedly
want to ensure they don’t have any of
these problems before ordering thousands of boards!
If you experience unexplained slowdowns, crashes or strange PCB manufacturing problems, especially when
working in collaboration with MCAD
software, it might be worth performing a PCB Health Check.
MCAD
Mechanical CAD is often closely
tied with EDA/ECAD since most electronic designs also require mechanical components, such as a case, front
panel etc. A custom case is typically
designed with dedicated MCAD software. Importantly, the electronic components must work with mechanical
parts, eg, to ensure that the electronics
will fit in the case and that the controls and displays line up correctly
with cut-outs.
Our Altium Designer 21 review
noted the ability to integrate with
MCAD programs such as SolidWorks,
AutoDesk Inventor and PTC Creo.
This requires the MCAD CoDesigner
extension.
This is not a feature we use as we
do not have subscriptions to these
programs, although we have dabbled
with using 3D models of enclosures to
generate renders of finished designs.
Protel Autotrax is still available for download and can be run on modern
operating systems under a DOS emulator. We only recommend doing this if you
want to see how we did things 30 years ago!
AD23 now supports integration with
Autodesk Fusion 360 and Siemens NX
MCAD software. This is done via the
Altium 365 server, with both Altium
Designer and the MCAD tool communicating with Altium 365.
Webinars
Altium’s ‘webinars’ are a great
resource for finding out about new
features in Altium Designer, as well
as existing features that might not be
immediately obvious. Apart from the
Gerber export dialog box, we probably
would have been unaware of many of
the newer features.
With ongoing software updates
between major versions, sometimes
they will add a new feature, and you
won’t necessarily know until it’s mentioned in a webinar!
The webinars also hint at new and
upcoming features, many of which can
be accessed via the beta program. The
beta program gives access to upcoming software versions before its general release.
One future feature we expect will
be handy is the upcoming wiring harness designer, which will involve a
new file type. Harnesses will have a
BOM (bill of materials), wiring and
layout, and they can be standalone
projects or be part of a multi-board
assembly.
The harness designer will also work
with Draftsman and allow manufacturing drawings to be created.
Altium Designer 23 can now integrate with numerous MCAD tools. There is no
need for manual file conversion, as Altium Designer works seamlessly with the
various native MCAD file formats.
60
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
Other planned features mentioned
in the webinar included sectional
views, an update to the variant manager and parameterised footprints.
MCAD integration will also be updated
to allow integration with multi-board
assemblies.
Summary
Altium Designer 23 adds quite a few
incremental features, many of which
we think will come in handy. We’re
already using the new Gerber expert
dialog box.
In particular, the pin functionality
feature will allow us to better annotate and document our schematic
diagrams. The PCB health check will
come in handy as well.
Even if you don’t use Altium
Designer, you might like to try the
free online tools that Altium provides.
Availability
Altium Designer 23 can be downloaded by those with a paid subscription; the latest software versions are
included with a subscription. See
www.altium.com/altium-designer/
If you haven’t used Altium Designer
before and you’d like to try it out, take
a look at www.altium.com/altium-
designer/free-trial/
Altium also offers CircuitMaker (see
our review in the January 2019 issue;
siliconchip.au/Article/11378), an EDA
tool targeted at hobbyists.
It has a similar feel to Altium
Designer, although designs are available for others to view online. You can
also visit https://circuitmaker.com/
And as we mentioned earlier,
Altium offers numerous free online
tools, such as the Gerber viewer and
Gerber compare. There is also Altium
Basic, which can be accessed by simply creating a free account.
SC
siliconchip.com.au
Fast and reliable temperature measurement.
Digital Thermometers
We stock a GREAT RANGE of thermometers, at GREAT VALUE,
for domestic or commercial applications.
MEASURE TEMPERATURES
IN HOT, HAZARDOUS OR
HARD TO REACH PLACES
HELPS YOU AVOID FOOD
FROM SPOILING
FRIDGE/FREEZER
THERMOMETER
• -50°C to 70°C range
• Min and max
alarm function
QM7209
JUST
29
$
95
Non-Contact
Thermometer
• -50°C to 500°C range
• 12:1 distance to spot ratio
• Built-in laser pointer
• Max, min, & auto data hold
QM7410
JUST
5495
$
WATCH OVER THE TEMPS
IN DIFFERENT ROOMS
SUITABLE FOR THE LAB,
WORKSHOP OR IN THE FIELD
WIRELESS IN/OUT
THERMOMETER/HYGROMETER
• -45°C to 65°C (Outdoor),
0°C to 60°C (Indoor) range
• 1% to 99% relative humidity range
• Connect up to 3 sensors
XC0322
JUST
4295
$
• -50°C to 750°C range
• Built-in temperature sensor
• K-type thermocouple input
QM1602
RECORD AND STUDY
TEMPS OVER TIME
TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY DATA LOGGER
• -40°C to 70°C temp / 0-100% relative humidity range
• 32,000 sample memory
• Records at prescribed intervals
• Easy USB interface
QP6013
Shop at Jaycar for:
Thermometer
with K-Type
Thermocouple
• Thermometers & Thermocouples
• Non-contact Thermometers
• Probe/Stem Thermometers
ONLY
129
$
JUST
4995
$
Includes Thermocouple
• Digital Multimeters with Temperature
• Desktop Temperature/Hygrometers
• Weather Stations
Explore our wide range of temperature measurement products, in stock
at over 110 stores and 130 resellers or on our website.
jaycar.com.au/thermometers
1800 022 888
Prices correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
Using Electronic Modules with Jim Rowe
ZPB30A1 Module
- 60W Programmable DC Load
- Battery Capacity Tester
This programmable constantcurrent DC load can be used for
testing power supplies or checking
the capacity of storage batteries. It
is essentially self-contained and delivers
good value for the money.
T
he ZPB30A1 module carries the brand name Zhiyu, but
it seems to be made in China by a firm
called AoSong ELE Co Ltd. As you can
see from the photos, it has two PCBs,
with the smaller one (69 × 36mm)
mounted above the larger main PCB
that measures 100 × 69mm.
The 50 × 50 × 23mm heatsink is at
the rear of the larger PCB, along with
its associated cooling fan on the finned
side, for cooling the main load transistor. The fan extends past the rear of the
main PCB by about 11mm.
Mounted on the flat front of the
heatsink is the power Mosfet that acts
as the controlled load (in the centre),
with a thermistor to its left used for
sensing its temperature. To its right is
a dual schottky diode that protects the
power transistor from damage due to
reversed voltage polarity.
The smaller PCB is the control and
display board, or the main ‘user interface’. Its four-digit 7-segment LED displays the voltage, battery capacity or
various control and error messages. In
contrast, the three-digit LED display
below it is mainly used to show the
current flow.
Six additional green 3mm LEDs
indicate which parameter is being
Features & Specifications
∎ Test modes: programmable constant-current DC load (“Fun1”) or battery
capacity tester (“Fun2”)
∎ Maximum dissipation: 60W
∎ Operating voltage range: 1-30V (separate 12V 500mA supply required)
∎ Operating current range: 0.1-9.99A in steps of 0.01A (10mA)
∎ Rated current measurement accuracy: ±(0.7% + 10mA)
∎ Test termination voltage range: 1-25V
∎ Voltage measurement: directly at the P+ and P− terminals or remotely for
four-terminal measurements
∎ Voltage measurement accuracy: ±(1% + 0.02V)
∎ Battery capacity maximum values: 999.9Ah, 9999Wh
∎ Battery capacity test accuracy: 2.5% <at> 0.5A, 1.5% <at> 2A or 1.2% <at> 5A+
∎ Protection: over-temperature (“otP”), transient over-power (“oPP”), overvoltage (“ouP”), reverse polarity (“Err3”) and abnormal voltage (“Err6”)
∎ Fan control: automatic, temperature-controlled
∎ Size: 69 × 111 × 57mm
∎ Weight: 270g
62
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
displayed or which 7-segment digit is
being adjusted, while a red 3mm LED
indicates when the module is running.
The function of the 3mm yellow LED
function is not explained; it is labelled
“L-4” and seems to be a recent addition to the latest (V3.3) version of the
module.
On the right of the smaller PCB are
the two controls. The first is a rotary
encoder, which changes modes and
adjusts current and voltage values. The
second is a small pushbutton used to
confirm the module’s current and termination voltage settings and as an
on/off control.
Currently, the ZPB30A1 module is
available from several sources on the
internet, including Banggood (www.
banggood.com/search/1146280.html)
and many suppliers on AliExpress
and eBay, ranging from $14.91 plus
$7.37 for delivery to $37.53 plus $4.48
for delivery.
I ordered one from Banggood at a
price near the high end, and after the
usual wait, it arrived safely – even
though it was only wrapped in bubble
wrap inside a plastic bag.
What it does
The module has two modes of operation. One is to serve as a programmable
constant-current DC load, while the
other is to test the capacity of storage
batteries like Li-ion, Nicad or lead-acid
batteries. The basic specifications are
shown in the sidebar.
The module’s internal circuitry is
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.1: a simplified block diagram of the ZPB30A1 module.
powered by a 12V DC supply that must
be separate from the measurement current source. The supply voltage must
be between 11V and 13V, delivering
at least 500mA. Power is applied to
the module via a standard barrel-type
DC connector (5.5mm outer diameter,
2.1mm inner diameter) on the left side
of the main PCB.
When power is applied, the module powers up in whichever of its two
operating modes was last used. This
mode is displayed in the upper fourdigit 7-segment LED display as either
“Fun1” for programmable load mode
or “Fun2” for battery capacity mode.
The module defaults initially to the
Fun1 mode. If you want to switch it
to the other mode, you need to switch
off the power, wait a few seconds and
then hold down the on/off pushbutton
while re-applying power. The module
then allows you to switch modes using
the rotary encoder, after which you
press the on/off button again to lock
the module into that mode.
The module’s testing inputs are on
the right-hand side of the main PCB.
The small two-way screw terminal
block is the main test input connector, with its inputs labelled “P+” and
“P−”. The smaller two-pin socket is
siliconchip.com.au
used for the optional remote voltage
sensing, to avoid errors due to voltage
drops in the connecting wires. Its pins
are labelled “V+” and “V−”.
How it works
Fig.1 shows a simplified block diagram of the ZPB30A1. I would have
liked to show a complete schematic,
but all I could find online was a partial
circuit (at www.voltlog.com) that had
been ‘reverse engineered’ and didn’t
cover everything on the main PCB, let
alone any of the circuitry on the display/control PCB. Still, all the most
important details are shown in Fig.1.
The ‘brains’ of the device is an
STM8S105K4 microcontroller unit
(MCU), shown at lower left. This
The rotary encoder on the display
PCB is used for changing modes and
adjusting the current & voltage values.
Australia's electronics magazine
responds to the controls on the display
and control board shown at upper left
and shows the parameter values and
testing status on the same board.
The load current control circuit is
shown at upper right. This uses the
W60N10 power Mosfet (Q2) to maintain the load current between the test
terminals P+ and P−, under the control
of the MCU via the I_SET line. The current is monitored using a 10mW shunt
resistor in Q2’s source connection; op
amp IC4b compares the voltage drop
across the shunt with the control voltage from the MCU.
You can see a simplified version of
the remote differential voltage sensing
input below the current control circuit,
using op amp IC4a. Its output is taken
to the AIN2 analog input of the MCU.
The thermistor mounted next to the
Mosfet on the heatsink is shown below
the remote voltage sensing input in
Fig.1. The TEMP SENSING line from
the thermistor goes to the MCU’s AIN0
analog input.
Note that the micro doesn’t have a
way to monitor the actual load current – there is no connection from the
10mW shunt to the micro. The actual
load current will equal the set current
almost all the time; if the source cannot
March 2023 63
The “main” PCB
measures 100 x 69mm
and has the heatsink
mounted on it. It’s also
where the majority of the
components and power
socket are located.
supply enough current to meet the target, the voltage will drop to near-zero,
triggering the under-voltage alarm. So
it is a safe assumption.
The cooling fan’s driver Mosfet, Q3,
is controlled by a PWM (pulse-width
modulated) signal from the PD0 digital output pin of the MCU. This allows
the MCU to turn on the fan as soon as
the thermistor reports that the heatsink temperature has risen significantly, and to increase the fan’s speed
as necessary to keep the temperature
under control.
If the temperature keeps rising
beyond a safe level, the MCU turns
off the load current and stops the test.
The piezo sounder is driven by
the MCU’s PD4 digital output pin.
This allows the MCU to attract your
attention whenever it
needs to do so; for example, when a test comes to
an end, or it detects an
error condition.
The module I received
did not have the 6-pin
header fitted (shown
above the piezo sounder);
there was just a set of
pads and holes labelled
G, R, T, L, F and Vc.
While there was no mention of these
in the sketchy data provided on the
Banggood website, when I searched
the internet, I found a couple of suggestions that the G, R and T pins could
be used for serial communication with
the MCU, at a rate of 115,200 baud and
with the standard 8N1 protocol.
The information I found said that
the module only transmitted serial
data in programmable current mode
(Fun1), containing three-byte messages with the first two bytes representing the voltage while the third
byte indicated testing status (1 = OK,
0 = undervoltage alarm).
Trying it out
The information on using the module provided on just about all of the
supplier websites is very vague and
quite hard to follow. As a result, you
are largely ‘on your own’ when it
comes to using it. It’s a matter of trial
and error, not made easy by the multiple functions of the module’s controls
and LED displays.
That is a pity, since it performs surprisingly well when you manage to get
it doing what you want.
The first thing I did was ensure
that my module was set to constant-
current load mode (Fun1). Then I used
the rotary encoder to set the load current for the test. This can be any value
between 0.1A (100mA) and 9.99A, in
steps of 0.01A (10mA).
After this, I connected the module’s
P+ and P− terminals to a 0-30V/5A
programmable power supply, with one
high-resolution bench DMM (digital
multimeter) monitoring the current
and another monitoring the actual
voltage at the P+ and P− terminals.
Then I pressed the module’s on/off
button to begin testing.
I set the power supply to a range
of voltage levels (3.30V, 5.00V, 9.00V,
12.00V, 15.00V, 20.00V, 25.00V and
30.00V), and at each voltage level,
I set the module to draw a series of
current levels. At every current level,
I used the bench DMM to set the voltage to precisely the desired level and
used the other DMM to check the exact
current.
The results of these tests are shown
in Fig.2. As you can see, in each case,
the applied voltage remained constant
over a wide range of current levels.
That remained true to a point where
either the module stopped the test
Fig.2: I tested the load on constant-current load mode (Fun1) at a range of different voltage levels. This figure shows the
current drawn by the module at those voltages.
64
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
due to the temperature rising above
the limit (plots ending in an “X”), or
my programmable power supply could
provide no more current at that voltage (plots ending in a dot).
Just to make sure, I undertook one
further test using a different power
supply capable of supplying 13.8V at
up to 12A. This resulted in the brown
plot in Fig.2. This showed that the
module could maintain a current just
below 5A at this voltage, corresponding to around 68W dissipation – not
bad considering that it is rated to handle a maximum of 60W.
During these tests, I monitored the
difference between the module’s voltage and current readings and those of
the two reference DMMs, to get an idea
of the module’s measurement accuracy. Its current readings turned out
to be less than 0.3% low for currents
of 2.0A and above, rising to 1.0% low
at 0.5A and 4% down at the lowest
current level of 100mA.
These figures compare pretty well
with the module’s rated accuracy of
±(0.7% + 0.01A).
The voltage readings turned out to
be less than 0.4% low over the entire
range, which is significantly better
than the rated accuracy of ±(1% +
0.02V).
So the ZPB30A1 module performs
well in programmable current load
(Fun1) mode. I moved on to checking
out its battery capacity/Fun2 mode.
Battery capacity testing
I fully charged an 18650 Li-ion cell,
then set up the ZPB30A1 module in
Fun2 mode with a discharge current of
1.0A and a minimum voltage of 3.00V.
After connecting the Li-ion cell to the
P+ and P− inputs, I pressed the module’s on/off button to begin testing.
Since the module doesn’t seem to
have any serial output in this mode,
I had to record the time and battery
voltage the old-fashioned way, using
a pen and paper while reading a stopwatch.
The results of this first test are
shown in Fig.3 (red plot). As you can
see, the cell didn’t last all that long at
the 1A discharge rate, with its voltage dropping below 3V after only 41
minutes.
The module then displayed its
capacity as 0.679Ah, close to my calculated figure of 683mAh (1A × 41
minutes ÷ 60 minutes). So its measurement was only about 0.58% low.
I recharged the same 18650 cell
overnight and set the ZPB30A1 to perform a second test at 500mA. I then
spent the next few hours recording
the battery voltage every five minutes,
again in the old-fashioned way.
The results of this second test are
shown in the blue plot in Fig.3. It
lasted a lot longer this time, with its
voltage only reaching just below the
test cutoff voltage of 3V after 228 minutes, corresponding to a capacity of
1900mAh. So it’s pretty clear that this
particular 18650 battery is only capable of delivering its rated capacity at
load currents of 500mA or less.
It’s also apparent that the ZPB30A1
is well suited to performing the battery capacity testing role, despite a
few minor drawbacks.
Summary
The ZPB30A1 module performs
both its main functions – a programmable constant current load and battery capacity tester – very well indeed,
especially considering its modest
price. But it does have a few failings,
including the lack of good instructions.
It’s also pretty disappointing that its
serial communications are so limited.
Having an adequately documented
serial connector that worked in all
modes and provided a complete set
of information would make it much
easier to monitor the load voltage and
time for each measurement.
Adding a serial port header and
supporting MCU firmware should
be straightforward and would make
things a lot easier, especially when
testing a battery’s capacity. Hopefully,
the module makers will add this serial
port feature to it soon, making it a
really handy piece of test gear.
Despite that, given its low cost, I still
think it is worth getting if you think
SC
you will use it.
Fig.3: battery capacity testing was performed with a fully-charged 18650 Li-ion cell and the module in Fun2 mode. The
test was done with a discharge current of 1A (and later at 0.5A) and battery voltage above 3V.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 65
Explore our GREAT RANGE of
Filament 3D Printers
Create amazing 3D prints with our great selection of 3D printers. The best brands at
great prices, stocked with spare parts, great service and advice.
AQUILA
EASY DIY
BEGINNERS
JUST
IN!
• PRINTS UP TO
260X260X260MM
• EASY TO ASSEMBLE
• PRINTS UP TO
220X220X250MM
• EASY TO ASSEMBLE
EXCEPTIONAL
VALUE! PERFECT
ENTRY LEVEL
GREAT VALUE!
PERFECT FOR MAKERS
ON A BUDGET
ONLY
299
$
TL4645
FLASHFORGE
ADVENTURER 3
TL4432
BREATHE EASY WITH
HEPA13 AIR FILTER
FLASHFORGE
ADVENTURER 4
• PRINTS UP TO
250X220X200MM
• MAGNETIC & LEVELLING
FREE PLATFORM
• BUILT-IN CAMERA FOR
REMOTE PRINTING
• HIGH TEMP HARDENED
NOZZLE
• SUPPORTS ABS, NYLON,
NYLON CARBON FIBRE
FILAMENT PRINTING
• PRINTS UP TO
150X150X150MM
• BUILT-IN CAMERA
FOR REMOTE
MONITORING
EASILY TRANSFER
FILES, MONITOR &
MANAGE ONLINE
ONLY
599
$
ONLY
499
$
ONLY
1099
$
TL4256
TL4431
Shop at Jaycar for:
• Resin Type 3D Printers
• Wide Range of Filament & Resin
• 3D Printer Tools and Spare Parts
• Filament Storage and Accessories
Explore our full range of 3D printers and accessories, in stock
at over 110 stores and 130 resellers or on our website.
jaycar.com.au/filamentprinters
1800 022 888
CREATE INFINITE LENGTH
OR BATCH PRINTS
Make infinite
length prints
Optional Extender Kit
TL4611 $349
CREALITY CR-30 LARGE FORMAT
• PRINTS UP TO 200X170MM X INFINITE
LENGTH PRINTS
• INFINITE-Z ROLLING CONVEYOR BELT
• 45° ANGLED NOZZLE
ONLY
1499
$
TL4610
QUICK CHANGE TOOL HEADS
FOR 3D PRINTING, LASER
ENGRAVING OR CNC CARVING
LARGE PRINT AREA, AND
EASY USE SOFTWARE
SNAPMAKER 3-IN-1
ALL IN ONE 3D PRINTER/LASER
ETCHER/CNC ROUTER
• A250T MODEL:
PRINTS UP TO 230X250X235MM
• A350T MODEL:
PRINTS UP TO 320X350X330MM
• MAGNETIC HEATED BUILD PLATE
• MULTI TOOL HEADS
POWER
SUPPLY
LASER
TOOL HEAD
FLASHFORGE GUIDER IIS
• PRINTS UP TO 280X250X300MM
• AUTO BED LEVELLING
• BUILT-IN CAMERA FOR
REMOTE MONITORING
• AIR FILTER
ONLY
2299
$
FROM
2199
CNC
TOOL HEAD
$
TL4239
TL4620/30
A GREAT PRICE FOR A PRINTER /
ENGRAVER / LASER ETCHER
All listed printers come with a heated bed, 0.4mm nozzle and print resume as standard.
ENTRY LEVEL
Model
Build Size
BEGINNERS
EASY ASSEMBLE
AQUILA
EASY DIY
TL4645
TL4432
MID LEVEL
FLASHFORGE
FLASHFORGE
ADVENTURER 3 ADVENTURER 4
TL4256
TL4431
ADVANCED
CREALITY
CR-30
FLASHFORGE
GUIDER IIS
SNAPMAKER
A250T
SNAPMAKER
A350T
TL4610
TL4239
TL4620
TL4630
260x260x260mm 220x220x250mm 150x150x150mm 250x220x200mm 200x170xInfinte 280x250x300mm 230x250x235mm 320x350x330mm
Frame Type
Open
Open
Enclosed
Enclosed
Open
Enclosed
Open
Removable Bed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Flexible Bed
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
N/A
No
Yes
Yes
Open
Layer Height
0.15-0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
0.15 - 0.4mm
Max Print Speed
120mm/s
100mm/s
100mm/s
150mm/s
120mm/s
100mm/s
180mm/s
180mm/s
Extruder Drive
Bowden
Bowden
Bowden
Bowden
Bowden
Direct
Direct
Direct
Main Interface
Dial and button
Dial and button
Touch screen
Touch screen
Dial and button
Touch screen
Touch screen
Touch screen
Levelling System
Manual
Manual
Assisted
Assisted
Manual
Assisted
Auto
Auto
Price
$299
$499
$599
$1099
$1499
$2299
$2199
$2599
Prices correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
Active Mains
Soft Starter
Part Two by John Clarke
Our Active Mains Soft Starter, introduced last month, is ideal for eliminating
the switch-on kick from power tools rated up to 750W. You can also use it
to avoid high inrush currents for stationary equipment that can trip circuit
breakers or wear out switches. This article covers the assembly, testing,
adjustment and calibration of this new Soft Starter.
T
he Active Mains Soft Starter uses a
combination of an NTC thermistor
and a Mosfet to provide an adjustable
soft-starting period. Notably, the Mosfet means that the thermistor experiences little heating, so repeated starts
(within reason) do not degrade the
effectiveness of the Soft Starter.
Both the Mosfet and the thermistor
are bypassed by a relay after soft starting so that there is very little power
loss or heating within the Soft Starter,
even with a high load current draw. It
is housed in a conveniently compact
17.1 × 12.1 × 5.5cm plastic enclosure
with an IEC mains input socket, GPO
output and three optional neon indicators to show what it is doing.
Because it monitors the load current,
it is automatically activated whenever
the load appliance is switched on,
even if the Soft Starter is already powered. That means you can use the trigger or switch on power tools to activate
them. Or, you can simply switch it on
at the wall, which is handy if you have
multiple devices connected to the output (eg, via a power board).
Having described what it does and
how it works, let’s move on to building it.
Construction
Most of the parts mount on a double-
sided, plated-through PCB coded
10110221 that measures 159 × 109mm.
Once assembled, it is housed within a
polycarbonate or ABS enclosure measuring 171 × 121 × 55mm. The only
off-board parts are the IEC mains input
socket, GPO mains output socket and
three neon indicators.
Fig.7 shows the parts layout on the
PCB. Begin by installing the surface-
mounting dual op amp (IC2). You will
need a soldering iron with a fine tip
(or a regular tip and some flux paste), a
magnifier (if you do not have excellent
Warning: Mains Voltage
The entire circuit of the Active Soft Starter floats at mains potential and could be
lethal should you make contact with it. Don’t assume that because we use isolation
between different parts of the circuit that some parts are safe to touch – they are
not! The isolation between parts of the circuit is to allow for the differing voltage
potentials in parts of the circuit rather than for safety.
68
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
vision) and good lighting.
Solder the IC to its PCB pads by
firstly placing it with the pin 1 locating
dot to the top left and aligning the IC
leads to the corresponding pads. Then
solder a corner pin and check that it
is still aligned correctly. If it needs to
be realigned, re-melt the soldered connection and gently nudge the IC into
alignment.
When you’re sure it’s correct, solder all the IC pins. Any solder that
runs between and bridges two pins
can be removed with solder wicking
braid (adding extra flux paste is recommended). Note that pins 6 and 7 are
joined on the PCB, so a bridge between
them won’t matter.
Fit the resistors next. They have
colour-coded bands indicating the
values (see Table 1), but it’s best to
use a digital multimeter (DMM) to
check each resistor before soldering
it in place. Three resistor types are
used; one is a 1kW 5W wirewound,
six are 1W types, and the remainder
are smaller 1/2W resistors. Mount the
5W resistor with a gap of about 1mm
from the PCB to allow air to circulate.
Diodes D1-D3 and zener diodes
ZD1-ZD3 are next on the list. Ensure
they are orientated correctly and the
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.7: assembly is
straightforward,
with most parts
mounting on the
PCB, as shown
here. Q1 has no
mounting hole
and is adhered to the PCB
using double-sided adhesive
thermal tape. Because of
supply constraints, we have
designed the board to accept
two different types of current
transformer, with either
two or three pins. Note that
the three
TVSs are
bidirectional,
so their
orientations
are not
critical.
types are not mixed up before soldering their leads.
TVS1-TVS3 can also be installed
now. These are bi-directional (AC)
devices, so they can be installed either
way around on the PCB. Make sure
the correct type number for each TVS
is inserted in the specified location.
Mount the remaining ICs, taking
care to get the correct IC in each place
and with the proper orientation. We
used a socket for IC1, although you
could solder it directly to the PCB,
assuming it has already been programmed. IC3 and IC4 both have six
pins, so don’t get them mixed up. On
the PCB, pin 5 of IC4 has only a tiny
pad to provide an increased creepage
distance between pins 4 and 6.
You can fit the capacitors next,
of which there are four types: the
mains X2-rated capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, MKT polyester and a
multi-layer ceramic. The electrolytic
capacitors need to be orientated correctly since they are polarised, while
the others can be installed either way
around.
Note that the 100nF capacitors could
be labelled as 104 (10pF × 104), while
the 4.7nF capacitor could be labelled
472 (47pF × 102) and the 1μF ceramic
siliconchip.com.au
capacitor could be labelled as 105
(10pF × 105).
Next, install potentiometer VR1
and thermistor NTC1. Bridge rectifier
BR1 is next; its positive lead is spaced
wider than the remaining leads, so it
will only fit in one way.
Mosfet Q1 can also be fitted now.
Bend its leads by 90° about 5mm from
the package and secure the metal tab
to the PCB using double-sided thermal transfer tape before soldering the
leads. Because the tracks are thin near
the pads for the Mosfet leads, build
up their exposed copper tracks on
the underside of the PCB with solder.
Install CON1 to CON4 next, as
well as the current transformer, T1.
Depending on which type of transformer you have, it might have two or
three leads. The PCB will accommodate either type.
The next step is to install relay RLY1
with its coil terminals toward CON4.
The relay is secured using 15mm-long
M3 screws and nuts, with each screw
inserted from the underside of the
PCB.
Winding transformer T2
The windings on the toroidal ferrite core for T2 are made with 0.25mm
Australia's electronics magazine
diameter enamelled copper wire, as
shown in Fig.8. The primary has 10
turns, while the secondary has 48
turns. Cut a 125mm length for the primary and 1m for the secondary and
wind on each side-by-side; the winding directions are unimportant. The
windings must be separated at least
3mm at each end.
Mount the finished transformer on
the PCB with two cable ties that both
secure the toroid and keep the primary
and secondary windings separated, so
make sure they go between the windings. The third cable tie holds down
the toroid in the middle of the secondary winding.
Fig.8: wind T2 as shown here,
keeping the windings neat and close
together and ensuring at least 3mm of
separation between the primary and
secondary at either end.
March 2023 69
Table 1: Resistor Colour Codes
Fig.9: these are the required cut-outs
in the side of the case and the lid.
You can download this diagram as
a PDF from the Silicon Chip website
and print it to use as a template. Be
careful making the IEC cut-out and
neon holes as if they are too large,
the parts will fall out. Try to avoid
the GPO cut-out coming too close to
the separate hole as, if the plastic in
between is thin, it could break.
Pass the primary and secondary
wires through the PCB pads and strip
off the insulation at all four ends to
allow the wires to be soldered. The
insulation can be burnt off with a hot
soldering iron, by holding a blob of
hot solder over the wire ends for a few
seconds. Otherwise, you can scrape
the insulation off with a sharp hobby
or craft knife.
Final assembly
The soft starter PCB is secured to the
base of the enclosure using 6mm-long
M3 machine screws that screw into
the integral brass inserts. But before
70
Silicon Chip
attaching the PCB, the IEC connector
cut-out will need to be made in the side
of the enclosure. You will also need to
drill holes in the lid for the GPO socket
and neon indicators.
Fig.9 is a template for the required
cut-outs. You can photocopy it from
the magazine at 1:1 scale or download
a PDF from the Silicon Chip website
and print it out (make sure to print it
at “actual size”).
The large cut-outs for the mains
GPO socket and IEC connector can be
made by drilling a series of small holes
around the inside perimeter, knocking out the centre piece and filing the
Australia's electronics magazine
outline to a smooth finish.
If you use Jaycar neon indicators,
the holes must be sized so that they
stay clipped in place when inserted
into the cut-out. So take care with the
hole size; the inside of the hole will
need a slight chamfer to reduce the
panel thickness so that the clips can
spring outward to secure each neon.
The Altronics neon indicators are
secured with a nut threaded onto the
plastic housing instead of clips.
Once the drilling and filing are complete, install the IEC connector. The
PCB can then be placed inside the case,
but don’t secure it just yet.
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.10: there are
two different
versions of the
front panel
artwork that you
can download,
either with
the neon holes
marked (as
shown here) or
without, if you’d
prefer not to fit
them.
First, the IEC connector must be
secured using countersunk Nylon M3
× 10mm screws, although you can use
metal nuts. You may need to cut away
some of the internal ribs in the case to
allow the nuts to fit as we had to for
the prototype (you can just see this in
the photo overleaf).
The Nylon screws are essential
as they avoid the possibility of the
screws becoming live (at mains voltage) should a mains wire inside the
enclosure come adrift and contact a
screw holding the IEC connector.
Before attaching the mains GPO and
neon indicators, you can print out the
front panel label shown in Fig.10. You
can also download it as a PDF from
our website. Details on making a front
panel label can be found at siliconchip.
au/Help/FrontPanels
The download includes two versions of the front panel. One does not
have the three neon indicator holes,
and is included if you prefer not to
use them. The wiring is also simplified
when not utilising neon indicators.
All wiring must be run as shown
in Fig.11, using mains-rated cable. Be
sure to use 10A cable for the thicker
wires shown in Fig.11; brown wire
must be used for the Active wiring
while the blue wire is used for Neutral. Green/yellow-striped wire is used
siliconchip.com.au
for the Earth wiring only, and the
Earth lead from the IEC socket must
go straight to the GPO.
The thinner wires shown (without
a red asterisk) can use lighter-duty
7.5A mains wire, or use 10A wiring
throughout if you prefer.
Be sure to insulate all the connections with heatshrink tubing for safety
and cable tie the wires as shown, to
prevent any wire breakages coming
adrift. Use 10mm diameter heatshrink
around the bodies of the neon indicators, 5mm for the wires to the IEC connector (red or brown for Active, blue or
black for Neutral and green for Earth)
and 3mm for the wires to the relay
(similar colour coding).
Note how the relay contact connections are made using 4.8mm spade
The relay
wires are cabletied to other mains wires
after installation in the case.
Australia's electronics magazine
71
Fig.11: be very careful to run all the wiring as shown here, including using the colours
shown, adding all the required insulation and the cable ties as indicated. All wires can
be run using 10A mains-rated cable, or you can use 7.5A-rated cable for the thinner wires
shown (without the red asterisks) if desired.
crimp lugs while the relay coil wires
are soldered. Try to avoid melting
the surrounding relay plastic housing while doing that, and be sure to
insulate the joints afterwards with
heatshrink tubing. The wires to the
IEC socket are also soldered and then
insulated.
Secure the Active and Neutral leads
to the GPO using cable ties that pass
through the holes in its moulding.
72
Silicon Chip
Also, use neutral-cure silicone (eg, roof
& gutter silicone) to cover the Active
bus piece that connects the Active pin
to the fuse at the rear of the IEC connector as it is live, and there is no good
reason for it to be exposed.
Take great care when making the
connections to the mains socket (GPO).
In particular, be sure to run the leads
to their correct terminals (the GPO has
the A, N and E clearly labelled) and do
Australia's electronics magazine
the screws up tightly so that the leads
are held securely. Similarly, ensure
that the wires to the screw terminals
are firmly secured.
Testing
Always attach the lid using at least
two screws at diagonal locations before
switching on the power.
Before applying power, check your
wiring carefully and make sure that
siliconchip.com.au
setting only needs to be done if the soft
start circuit does not correctly detect
when the appliance is off.
To set this offset, with the power off
and unplugged from the wall, rotate
VR1 fully clockwise. No appliance
should be plugged into the Soft Starter’s GPO outlet. Attach the lid, power
it up and wait a few seconds before
switching it off. This will let it store
the DC voltage produced by IC2 when
no current is measured.
Unplug it, remove the lid and rotate
VR1 back from fully clockwise to the
desired soft-start period. As mentioned earlier, somewhere mid-way
will give a suitable soft-start duration
of one or two seconds for most situations. However, other periods are
available depending on the appliance
requirements.
Choosing the soft-start period
The completed unit just before the lid is attached. The numerous cable ties
mean that even if a wire breaks off, it can’t make contact and damage other
parts of the circuit or create a shock hazard.
all mains connections are covered in
heatshrink tubing, and the wiring is
cable tied. Then install the 10A fuse
inside the fuse holder and verify that
IC1 is plugged into its socket and correctly orientated.
Should you forget to install IC1
before powering up, the 4.7nF capacitor at the pin 4 connection could be
left with a remnant voltage when you
switch off the power. This can destroy
IC1 when it is plugged in. So if you
power it up without IC1 plugged in,
wait for a few minutes with power off
and check that the voltage between
pins 4 and 8 is less than 1V before
plugging in the IC.
Typically, VR1 would be set to midtravel for a nominal one-second softstart period. If set full anti-clockwise,
VR1 gives a 9.5s soft-start period while
near full-clockwise gives a half-second
soft start period.
Calibration
Rotating VR1 fully clockwise has the
soft starter enter another mode. This is
used to measure the voltage from the
precision rectifier when no appliance
is connected. This is the offset voltage
siliconchip.com.au
that needs to be taken into consideration when detecting whether there is
current flow or not when an appliance
is detected.
Typically, the output of IC2a (the
full-wave rectified current waveform)
will not sit at the negative supply at
pin 4 with no load, but will be slightly
positive. This offset can be measured
and taken into account by IC1. This
The available periods are 9.5, 5.5,
2.0, 1.0, 0.625 or 0.5 seconds, adjusted
using VR1. You can use the slower
rates for soft-starting capacitive loads
if you are not concerned about how
long it will take to power up the load.
The 9.5s startup period is probably too
long for most cases, but a 5.5s period
is a good option.
For power tools, the best period
depends on the time the tool takes to
get up to full speed and the acceptable
amount of movement the tool makes
during starting.
A shorter duration will produce
more tool movement than a longer
duration but will let you get to work
faster. If the period is longer than necessary, you will need to wait longer for
SC
the tool to be ready to use.
The finished
Active Mains
Soft Starter
is easy to
use, just plug
your desired
appliance
into the
GPO on the
front panel
and then
connect the
Soft Starter
to mains
power via
the IEC
plug on its
side.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 73
73
ADVANCED
TEST
SMD
T EEZERS
Part 2 by Tim Blythman
This new design, introduced last month, adds many features to the SMD
Test Tweezers concept. No longer only for testing passive components, the
new Tweezers can also act as a voltmeter, logic probe, basic oscilloscope,
square wave generator and serial protocol analyser. This final article has all
the construction and usage details.
T
he Advanced Test Tweezers
circuit is simple and the PCB
compact. The new functions
are provided by the substantially
larger firmware hosted in a 16-bit
PIC24 rather than an 8-bit PIC12 or
PIC16. That’s due to the PIC's hugely
increased flash memory size, up from
7kiB to 256kiB, for only a couple of
dollars more!
This has allowed us to fit so many
new modes, and enhance the existing ones, that a substantial part of
this article will explain how to use
them all. But before we get to that,
we need to assemble the Tweezers.
You can gather the parts yourself and
program the blank PIC using software
downloaded from our website, or you
can buy a complete kit with the PIC
already programmed.
The design uses an SSOP-28 package microcontroller and M2012/0805
passive components, so the pin
spacings are a bit tighter than the
SOIC-8 and M3216/1206 parts that
we used previously. Still, it’s eminently doable with patience and a
fine-tipped soldering iron (or even a
larger tip, if you know how to use it;
flux paste is your friend).
Start by assembling the main PCB
and solder the microcontroller first.
It’s easily the part with the finest pitch
pins and is best dealt with if no other
components get in the way.
Apply flux to the pads on the PCB,
then rest the IC in place, making sure
pin 1 is aligned with the dot. Clean
the tip of the iron and add some fresh
solder, then carefully tack one pin
and check with a magnifier that the
pins are aligned on their pads and flat
against the PCB.
If necessary, adjust its position by
remelting the solder and gently nudging it. Your life will be much easier if
you get all the pins close to perfectly
lined up with the pads now. Then,
carefully solder each pin in turn, keeping the iron low on the pads, cleaning the tip and adding solder to it as
necessary. You can apply more flux to
the pins too. You can also drag-solder
them if you know how.
Check that the pins are soldered
and that there are no bridges. If there
are bridges, add more flux and use
some solder wick to draw out the extra
Construction
Like the earlier Tweezers variants,
we’re mainly using surface-mounting
parts to keep it compact. The main
change from the earlier versions is that
the 28-pin micro has more closely-
spaced pins than the 8-pin micros
used before, but some passives are
slightly smaller too. So you will need
tweezers, flux paste, solder-wicking
braid and a magnifier to complete
this build.
Use solder fume extraction or work
outside if you don’t have one. Refer
to Figs.5 & 6 (the PCB overlays) and
photos as you go, which show where
the components are mounted.
74
Silicon Chip
The Advanced SMD Test Tweezers consists of the
Main PCB (top and underside shown enlarged) and
one of the Arm PCBs shown below (actual size).
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
solder. Surface tension should leave a
small but sufficient amount of solder
attached to the pin and pad.
If you haven’t previously done any
work with parts this small, you might
like to clean the excess flux away to
make it easier to inspect your work as
you go. Even if you’re experienced, it’s
best to clean it up when you’re done
and use a magnifier to verify that all
the solder joints have adhered to the
pins and pads, and that there are no
hard-to-see bridges.
The remaining 14 passive components on the top of the PCB are all
M2012/ 0805 size (2 × 1.2mm); none
are polarised. The resistors should
be marked with codes representing
their values, but the capacitors will
probably not be. If in doubt, the 10µF
part is likely the thicker or larger
capacitor.
Apply flux to the pads for all the
parts and solder the 10µF capacitor
first. Like the IC, tack one lead, check
that it is flat and aligned within its
pads, then solder the other lead. Apply
more flux and touch the iron to the first
pad to refresh the joint.
Use the same technique to solder
the two 100nF capacitors, then the
resistors, in the locations shown in
Fig.5.
There are only a few parts on the
reverse of the PCB: two diodes and the
cell holder, as shown in Fig.6. Solder
in the two diodes now. Though small,
the SOT-23 parts are pretty easy to
work with and should only fit in the
correct orientation.
Then solder the cell holder. Make
sure that the opening faces the edge
of the PCB, as shown in Fig.6 and
the photos. Use a generous amount
of solder to ensure the connection is
mechanically sound.
It’s a good idea to clean any flux
residue off the PCB now. Doing so at
this stage means that the entire PCB
can be immersed in a solvent before
the switches are fitted, so it won’t get
into their mechanisms.
Your flux’s data sheet should recommend a solvent, but we find that
isopropyl alcohol works well in most
cases. Allow the PCB to dry thoroughly. The Advanced Tweezers can
measure relatively high resistances,
and traces of flux residue could affect
readings.
Now is a good time to thoroughly
inspect the soldering of the smaller
surface-mounted parts, as it will be
tricky to make any repairs once the
OLED has been fitted. Look closely for
solder bridges and check that IC1 is in
the correct orientation.
Solder the three tactile pushbuttons
in place next. That should be easy, as
they have relatively large pads. You
can carefully wipe away any flux
residue left behind with a cotton tip
dipped in solvent.
Pre-calibration
The standard 1% resistors used
give the Advanced Tweezers a useful
degree of accuracy. Still, if you have
access to an accurate multimeter,
you can measure the exact value of
the six ‘probing’ resistors to improve
its accuracy. They are marked in red
in Fig.5.
These are the 1kW, 10kW and 100kW
resistors along the side near the top
of IC1. The four lower 1kW resistors
also affect measurements in the Scope
and Meter modes, but we’ve provided an automatic calibration for
them that does not depend on their
exact values.
Measure and separately note the
exact values of the six resistors. It’s
much easier to do this now, before the
OLED is fitted over the top. A menu
will allow these values to be loaded
into the Tweezers during the calibration stage.
Programming IC1
If you don’t have a pre-programmed
chip (we sell a programmed micro
individually and as part of a kit), you
will need to program it using a programmer such as a PICkit 3, PICkit 4
or Snap. If you need to provide power
to the chip (likely if you are using the
Snap), you can temporarily insert a
coin cell into the holder.
The ICSP header, CON1, can be
soldered in place for programming.
However, we find it’s sufficient to
insert a five-way header pin strip into
the PCB pads, so you might like to try
that. This way, the header does not
get in the way when the arms are fitted. Gentle sideways pressure on the
header during programming should
keep the pins in contact with the
plated holes.
We recommend programming using
the free MPLAB X IPE software. Select
the correct part (PIC24FJ256GA702)
and open the 0410622A.HEX file. Use
the Program button to upload the HEX
file to the device.
The only indication that programming was successful will be a message
like “Program/verify complete” in the
Figs.5 & 6: remember to measure the resistances of the resistors marked in red and thoroughly check the soldering for
bridges before fitting the OLED. It will take a lot of work to get to the top of this PCB (shown at left) after the OLED is
fitted. You can use the large pad at top right (light grey) to support the OLED module by soldering a short piece of stiff
wire between the two. The cell holder and two dual diodes are on the reverse side of the PCB (shown at right). The diodes
should only fit one way, but the cell holder can be reversed. Fit it in the orientation shown so a cell can be inserted from
the side near the edge of the PCB. Both overlays are shown enlarged at 150% of actual size.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 75
Fig.7: this shows how the two arms attach to the main PCB. It is easier to solder and align the tips to the arms after the
arms are fitted to the main PCB. The arms are shown parallel here, but it's better to angle them as shown opposite.
bottom window of the IPE. If you have
fitted a cell, remove it now to complete
the assembly.
Fitting the arms and tips
The arms must be fitted before the
display to ensure that the OLED is
spaced clear above the main PCB and
clear of the arms. For the tips, we use
the same arm design as the Updated
Tweezers from April 2022, including the gold-plated header pins. Fig.7
shows the arrangement.
The gold-plated header pins are
easy to source, and as a bonus, they
can also plug directly into prototyping gear like jumper wire sockets and
breadboards. Fit the arms to the main
PCB, then solder the tips, making it
easier to align the tips to be the same
length and parallel.
Place the arms as seen in the photos.
They connect to the CON+ and CON−
pads and should have their copper
tracks on the inside of the arms to
reduce stray capacitance while being
handled.
They should only extend past the
CON+ or CON− pads where they leave
the PCB. This will keep the arms clear
of other connections on the PCB, especially those for the OLED screen.
Angle the arms slightly inward to
achieve about 15mm of tip separation when at rest. This will allow the
Advanced Tweezers to be used with
axial leaded components too. You
could set them closer if you only use
them on surface-mounting parts.
Use a small amount of solder to
take the arms and adjust their positions as necessary. Then use a generous amount of solder on both sides of
the arms and main PCB to ensure a
good mechanical connection between
them.
Keep the pin headers side-by-side
in their plastic holder until they
are soldered, as this will keep them
aligned. Use a generous amount of solder and ensure it flows into the holes
on the arm PCB, giving more strength.
Test the action of the arms and if
necessary, use your iron to melt the
solder and adjust them.
OLED installation
The final step is to fit the OLED module, MOD1. If the OLED does not have
a header strip fitted, attach that first,
ensuring that the pins are perpendicular to its PCB.
The OLED needs to be fitted such
that it cannot flex and touch any other
part of the Tweezers, so space it about
1mm above the arms. You can use BluTack or similar to locate it squarely
in place, and tack one lead to confirm. Check that there is clearance all
around between the PCB and OLED.
Then solder the remaining leads to
their PCB pads.
Take care when operating the Advanced Test Tweezers
The Advanced Tweezers make use of a coin cell. Even though we have
added protections such as the locking screw, there is no reason for this
device to be left anywhere that children could get hold of it. Also, the tips
are pretty sharp and might cause injury if not used with care.
Avoid applying voltages across the Tweezers test tips when it is actively
driving them. While this obviously includes the Tone mode, remember that
the pins are also driven in the I/V, Auto, Res, Cap and Diode modes.
So be sure that the Tweezers are set to the Meter, Scope, UART or
Logic mode before connecting to an external voltage source. If a glitch
causes the Tweezers to reset, they restart in Meter mode to avoid further
damage.
76
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
Removal of the coin cell is stopped by
a Nylon screw and two nuts.
siliconchip.com.au
The arrangement of the arms and tips is much the same as that for the Updated Tweezers, using the same arm PCBs (blue
this time) and gold-plated pins as simple, practical tips. This photo shows operation in left-handed mode.
Initial testing
At this stage, the Tweezers are complete enough to do a quick functional
test. Insert the cell into the holder, and
the OLED should light up in Meter
mode, with a reading under 1V. Pressing S1 should cause the counter at bottom right to start flashing, and S2 will
cause it to stop flashing. Pressing S3
will switch to the next mode (Scope).
If something else happens, your
Tweezers probably have a problem, so
you should remove the cell and check
the assembly. If the displayed voltage
is wrong, check that the resistors all
have the correct values and are in the
right locations. Any of the switches not
working could point to that switch not
being soldered correctly.
Any problem you spot might also be
due to a soldering problem with IC1,
particularly bridged pins or a solder
joint that doesn’t contact both the pin
and pad.
If all is well, the assembly can be
completed after removing the cell. The
top-right mounting hole of the OLED
is designed to be soldered to the main
PCB using a header pin or similar. This
will prevent the OLED from flexing at
this end and coming into contact with
the arms.
You can now apply heatshrink
tubing to the arms, taking care not to
Fig.8: this sticker is for protecting
the rear of the Advanced Tweezers
PCB. Alternatively, you can print the
artwork, laminate it, cut it out and
glue it to the back of the cell holder.
siliconchip.com.au
direct heat towards the OLED screen.
Cover as much of the arms as possible from the main PCB to just before
the tips.
The back of the Tweezers is protected by a small sticker that will
be supplied with the kit or PCB set,
shown in Fig.8. You can also download the artwork from siliconchip.au/
Shop/11/128
If printing it yourself, it’s a good idea
to laminate it. Cut along the border to
make a shape to match the main PCB.
For more advice on making labels,
see siliconchip.au/Help/FrontPanels
Then use clear neutral-cure silicone
or a similar adhesive to secure it to the
back of the Tweezers. A small amount
of glue on each of the arms and the
back of the cell holder should be sufficient to hold it in place.
Finally, fit the cell and secure it
using the Nylon screw and two nuts.
Put the head of the screw at the front,
on the same side as the switches, so the
extra height of the thread at the back
blocks the cell from being removed.
Before using the Tweezers, we recommend performing some calibration
steps, explained just below. We’ll also
explain all the various modes and how
to use them.
In general, pressing S3 cycles
between the various modes and S1 and
S2 have different functions depending
on the mode. A long press (more than
one second) of S3 changes between
Settings and the normal operating
modes.
In Settings mode, pressing S3 cycles
between the different settings, while
S1 and S2 adjust the particular setting,
as described on the screen.
Calibration__________________
The calibration procedure has a few
steps but is fairly logical. To enter the
Settings mode, hold S3 for more than
a second and release.
Australia's electronics magazine
#1 Handedness
Screen 1: being configured for right- or
left-handed operation doesn’t change the
polarity of the CON+ or CON− connections,
but the diode polarity icons will appear
relative to the arms.
The first page allows the display
orientation to be set to suit either lefthanded or right-handed operation –
see Screen 1. The setting is toggled
by pressing either S1 and S2, and the
change occurs immediately.
All settings like this take effect
immediately, so you can test them
before being saved to non-volatile
flash memory. There is also a Restore
option to reload the initial defaults in
case of a problem. Pressing S3 cycles
to the next page.
#2 Six resistor values
Screen 2: while it will provide reasonably
accurate readings without calibration, it is
better to enter the exact values of the six
most critical resistors (see Fig.5; as measured
by a multimeter) on these screens.
The following six pages set the values of the probing resistors you measured earlier, as shown in Screen 2.
After the resistor value is an “L” or “R”,
indicating whether you are setting the
March 2023 77
value of the corresponding resistor on
the left or right side of the main PCB.
The values are adjusted in steps
of 0.1%, ie, 1W for the 1kW resistors,
10W for the 10kW resistors and 100W
for the 100kW resistors. Use S1 and S2
to adjust these values, and then press
S3 to step to the next.
On all pages like this, S1 will
increase the displayed value and S2
will decrease it. Brief presses will
make single steps, but holding the
button in will cause it to increment or
decrement about ten times per second.
#3 Internal reference voltage
Screen 3: diode and capacitor measurements
will be most accurate if the internal bandgap
reference is calibrated. Adjust it using S1 and
S2 until the displayed cell voltage is correct.
The BAT page (Screen 3) calibrates
the internal reference, which is nominally 1200mV and is shown at the
page's bottom. The value on the second line is the calculated cell voltage
based on the reference setting.
Trimming this parameter is best
done with a multimeter. Measure
the actual cell voltage (which can be
measured at pins 2 and 3 of the ICSP
header) and adjust the displayed cell
voltage until it matches.
The voltage shown in Screen 3 is
higher than might be expected from
a coin cell, as we were using a 3.3V
supply for testing. In this case, the
reference voltage has been trimmed
upwards by about 3%, from 1200mV
to 1237mV.
#4 Lead/tip resistance
Screen 4: the lead resistance was close
to 0Ω in our prototype, but this setting
might be handy if you are working with
breadboards and jumper wires with
significant resistance.
The next page (Screen 4) sets the
lead resistance, which defaults to 0W.
Our prototypes had less than 1W of
lead resistance and so were accurate
enough; thus, you probably do not
need to change this. You can test this
by pressing the tips together on a mode
that displays resistance.
If you are connecting extra leads or
jumper wires and breadboards, you
can account for the higher resistance
with this setting.
#5 Auto calibration
Silicon Chip
#6 Stray capacitance
Screen 6: stray capacitance can be tuned
automatically or entered manually; it should
be around 100pF. You can check it varies by
setting it to 0pF and watching the value on
the Cap screen.
The stray capacitance of our prototype is around 100pF; check that you
have a similar value, as seen in Screen
6. A vastly different value might indicate a problem, like a resistor in the
wrong location.
#7 Meter offset
Screen 5: the AUTO SET tunes three
calibration parameters by performing
internal measurements with the tips open. It
depends on the previous calibration settings
being entered and correct.
The next page (Screen 5) provides
the option to AUTO SET several
parameters, namely stray capacitance,
Meter offset and CTMU trim. These
require the tips to be left open and not
As shown last month, a header pin is used to act as a reinforcing spacer at one
corner of the OLED. This prevents the assembly flexing and causing a short
between the two PCBs.
78
connected to anything, and are only
accurate when the previous settings
(test resistances and internal reference
voltage) have been calibrated.
Hold the Tweezers as you usually
would to take into account the stray
capacitance of your hand. Then press
S1 to start this process. It takes less
than a second and you can review
the values on the subsequent pages
by pressing S3.
Australia's electronics magazine
Screen 7: Meter offset adjusts for any
difference in the two 1kΩ/1kΩ dividers and
is set by the AUTO SET page. The 16mV error
is noise in the ADC measurement, being a
single ADC step.
The Meter offset adjusts the relative
value of the four lower 1kW resistors;
it is effectively the difference between
the midpoints of the two voltage dividers shown in Fig.4 last month. The
value at the bottom is the number of
ADC steps used to adjust the reading.
In Screen 7, you can see the actual
Meter reading at top right. You can validate this by verifying that the reading
hovers close to 0mV when the tips are
open. The -16mV seen corresponds to
a single ADC step, and thus the resolution in this mode.
siliconchip.com.au
#8 Current source trimming
#10 Screen blanking timeout
Screen 8: the CTMU’s current source is also
trimmed by the AUTO SET page but has very
coarse trimming, with 2% steps. You can
observe this by manually adjusting the trim
value on this page.
Screen 10: with an option to disable the
timeout in all modes, the timeout value is
less critical than on the earlier Tweezers. The
default is 30s, but it can be set from 3s to 99s
to suit your needs.
The CTMU current source, used for
capacitance measurements, can be
trimmed on Screen 8. The lower value
is the degree of trimming, with each
step being a delta of about 2%. This is
a hardware limitation and is a significant factor in limiting the accuracy of
capacitance measurements.
The value shown at upper right is
the deviation of the measured current
from its nominal value on the 550µA
scale, while the lower number indicates the amount of trimming, with
zero being the default. With a 2%
deviation, the steps are around 11µA
apart, so a setting within about 5µA of
zero is optimal.
Note that the Meter reading depends
on the internal bandgap reference voltage being set correctly, as does the
CTMU trim. The CTMU trimming procedure uses one of the 1kW resistors
and thus depends on its actual resistance too. So ensure these values are set
before running the AUTO SET process.
Screen 10 sets the display Timeout
and is the countdown (in seconds)
before the Tweezers enter their lowpower sleep mode after the last button
press. This value can be set between
3 and 99 seconds with a default value
of 30s.
Note that the operating screens all
have the option to freeze the timer so
that the Tweezers can be used continuously when required.
#9 OLED brightness
#11 Save settings to flash
Screen 11: all calibration and operation
parameters are live as soon as they are set.
On this page, you can press S1, then S2 to
save them to flash memory so you won’t have
to repeat the calibration.
Screen 11 gives the option to Save
the calibration settings to flash memory. On this page, press and release
S1 and then S2 to save the data. You
should do this once the Tweezers are
set up to your liking.
#12 Restore settings from flash
Screen 9: the OLED is one of the major drains
on the coin cell, so a low brightness setting
increases the cell life. We had no trouble
using the Tweezers with the OLED set to quite
a low brightness.
On Screen 9, the display brightness
can be set between 32 and 255, with
64 being the default. This setting is a
compromise between display visibility and cell life. You should set this to
the lowest level at which you can still
read the screen clearly.
siliconchip.com.au
Screen 12: if the settings become corrupt,
the Restore option will load defaults from
a backup location. You can also load flash
defaults by holding S3 while powering on the
Tweezers.
Australia's electronics magazine
The Restore page (Screen 12) can be
used to reload the default settings from
a backup copy. These settings are put
into use straight away.
Although it would be very unusual,
it’s possible for the saved settings
in flash to be corrupted. This might
happen if, for example, power is lost
while writing to flash. Such corruption can be detected by the micro and
trapped to avoid improper settings
being used.
If you get a “Flash Error” message
when powering up the Tweezers,
remove the cell and hold S3 in while
reinserting it (giving a “No Flash”
message).
This bypasses the loading of the
settings from flash, after which you
can use the Restore and Save pages to
reload and rewrite the flash memory
with uncorrupted data.
You should then treat the Tweezers
as if they have not been calibrated and
repeat the calibration procedure.
#13 Exit settings
Screen 13: besides this screen, you can
also leave the Settings pages at any time
by pressing and holding S3 for more than
a second. A brief press of S3 will take you
back to the first Setting.
Screen 13 shows the final Exit page
that allows you to press S1 or S2 to
return to operating mode, while S3
will return to the first Settings page. A
long press on S3 at any time will also
exit Settings mode.
Operation___________________
During operation, the bottom line
in all modes shows data that always
has the same format. From left to right,
it shows the current mode, the cell
voltage and a countdown timer. If the
timer is flashing, it has been paused
and does not count down, allowing
continuous operation.
When the timer counts down to
zero, the Tweezers will enter the lowpower sleep mode with a blank display. Pressing any of S1, S2 or S3 will
reset the timer and resume normal
operation.
March 2023 79
#1 Meter mode
Screen 14: the initial Meter display mode,
which can read up to 30V with both negative
and positive polarities (with respect to CON+
and CON−). The resolution is 10mV to 9.99V
and 0.1V above that.
The Tweezers start on the Meter
screen, which displays the measured
voltage between the probe tips. Screen
14 shows the Tweezers in Meter mode,
connected to a fresh 9V battery.
Pressing S1 in this mode will pause
the sleep counter and pressing S2 will
resume it. As is typical, any button
press will also reset the sleep counter.
Pressing S3 cycles to the next mode.
#2 Scope mode
time division, which is marked by a
more solid vertical graticule.
Thus, one time division is displayed
before the trigger point and three after.
A tiny arrowhead also marks the trigger voltage level to the left of the grid
area.
Due to the slow update speed of
the OLED display, the trace is not displayed live. Instead, a sample set is
taken, spanning around two full screen
widths. It is checked for trigger conditions and an appropriate portion is
displayed.
If no trigger is found (or AUTO trigger mode is selected), the first screenful of samples taken is displayed, along
with a “WAIT” message. If a trigger is
found, then the trigger point is aligned
with the graticule and “TRIG” is displayed.
Since a complete sample set at some
of the longer time divisions can take
several seconds, it can be a while
before data is displayed.
#3 UART serial decoding
Screen 15: Scope mode is handy, even
though there are only 100 horizontal and 48
vertical pixels in the trace area. It samples at
up to 25kHz, is suitable for audio use, and
has adjustable trigger settings.
Screen 16: we find the UART Serial Decoder
indispensable at times. Like the Scope mode,
it is highly configurable in terms of baud
rates, bit depth and data polarity. This shows
the TXT view.
Scope mode is shown in Screen 15,
with a nominally 100Hz 6V peak-topeak waveform fed to the Tweezers by
a second set of Advanced Tweezers in
the Tone mode.
This has various parameters to set;
pressing S1 cycles between the parameters, while S2 adjusts the selected
parameter by cycling between the
available options.
You can see which parameter is
selected as it will be flashing. These
include the vertical axis maximum
(voltage), trigger mode (RISE, FALL,
BOTH or AUTO), trigger level in volts,
timebase per division and whether the
vertical axis minimum is 0V or the
negative of the maximum.
Pressing S1 also cycles through the
countdown timer; while it is selected,
the countdown timer is paused.
The trigger point is fixed at the first
The next mode is the Serial Decoder,
labelled “UART” (see Screen 16). The
bottom text shows the current settings, which are similar to those in
Scope mode. S1 cycles between the
parameters (including the sleep timer)
while S2 adjusts the selected, flashing
parameter.
The first setting is the baud rate,
which includes standard rates from
110 to 115,200 baud. The second
setting is the format, which can be
eight bits with odd, even or no parity or nine bits with no parity. These
are shown as 8O, 8E, 8N or 9N and
are followed by a choice of one or
two stop bits.
The idle logic level is next and can
be HI or LO, followed by a choice of
text or hexadecimal (“TXT” or “HEX”)
display output.
Screen 16 shows TXT mode, which
80
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
works much like a serial terminal and
will handle line feed, carriage return
and tab characters. The text will scroll
up as lines are filled at the bottom of
the screen. The text seen here is actually a decoded square wave; hence, the
same character is repeated.
HEX mode does not handle any
control characters but displays both
ASCII and HEX representations, also
scrolling up as needed. Only HEX
mode can display the full range of
9-bit data, and it also indicates parity
(“P”) and framing (“F”) errors. Screen
17 shows the same data as Screen 16
but in HEX mode.
The decoding depends on the
PIC24FJ256GA702’s hardware UART
and logic levels, but since the I/O pins
are behind the protective resistors, this
will work fine with any logic levels of
around 3V or higher. Even non-TTL
voltage levels, such as legacy RS-232
(which can swing between -15V to
+15V) should be successfully decoded
by choosing a LO idle level, since -15V
is the idle level.
Screen 17: the Serial Decoder also offers
a hexadecimal mode, useful for seeing
binary data and control codes. Framing or
parity errors are shown, which can help to
determine the data format.
#4 I/V plotter
Screen 18: while Diode mode cannot report
dual diodes such as bicolour LEDs, the I/V
Plotter shows both polarities. The current and
voltage scales can be zoomed in for more
detail.
Screen 18 shows the I/V (current vs
voltage) plotter, designed to characterise passive components. This uses
much the same scheme as Meter mode,
applying a voltage via different resistor
combinations to probe the component
at different operating points.
siliconchip.com.au
Six readings are taken, including the
voltage and current at each point. This
is limited to about ±3V due to the cell
supplying the test current; the current
can be no more than around 1.5mA
due to the minimum 2kW resistance.
Like in Scope mode, the vertical
and horizontal scales can be adjusted
by using S1 to cycle between current
(vertical), voltage (horizontal) and the
timeout counter. S2 cycles between the
available values.
The horizontal scale can be set to 1V,
0.5V, 0.25V, 0.1V or 0.05V per division,
while the vertical scale can be 1mA,
500µA, 200µA, 100µA or 50µA per
division. The values are displayed in
mV and µA, respectively.
The 0V/0A origin is always at the
centre of the display, and the I/V display updates continuously, so it is
well-suited to sorting through piles
of unmarked parts. Screen 18 shows
what it indicates for a yellow LED with
a forward voltage of around 1.7V.
#5 Logic Analyser
Screen 19: the Logic Analyser shows whether
it detects a high, low or high impedance logic
level. A scrolling chart also shows a brief
history, making it easier to see transients and
repeating patterns.
Pressing S3 again switches to the
Logic Analyser, as shown above in
Screen 19. Sensing is done by alternately probing with high and low
voltage levels via one of the 100kW
resistors. A voltage that follows the
probing voltage is assumed to be high
impedance.
It shows 1, 0 or Z at the left of the
screen to indicate a logical high, low
or high impedance level. A horizontal scrolling display also
shows about a second’s worth
of history to allow brief transients or waveforms to be discerned.
Here, we see a high-level signal that is interrupted by brief
low pulses. Like in the Scope
and Meter modes, S1 and S2 will
pause and resume the countdown
timer, respectively.
siliconchip.com.au
#6 Tone Generator
an audio signal via a series capacitor
(in the circuit, or added), which will
remove the DC offset.
#7 Component measurements
Screen 20: like Scope mode, the Tone
Generator is handy at audio frequencies or
as a simple clock generator. It can produce
square waves at five different frequencies
and four different amplitudes.
Screen 20 shows the Tone Generator. Unlike most of the other mode
settings, which are retained between
uses, the tone is turned off when it
is not being used to avoid interfering
with other modes. It can be toggled on
and off by pressing S2 when the ON/
OFF indicator is flashing.
There are choices of 50Hz, 60Hz,
100Hz, 440Hz and 1kHz. Only square
waves are produced. There are four
output (peak-to-peak) levels, which
are nominally 300mV, 600mV, 3V
and 6V.
The 300mV waveform is produced
by toggling one output via a 10kW
resistor and dividing that with a 1kW
resistor to ground. The 600mV selection drives two outputs similarly, but
with opposing phases, to achieve the
necessary swing.
The 3V and 6V outputs are fed to
the tips directly from one or two pins
respectively, without the divider. The
level selections assume that the supply
is at 3V and the load resistance is relatively high. Under other conditions,
the voltages could be different.
Because of the way they are generated, the 300mV and 3V outputs also
have a DC offset that the other two
modes do not. So, you can use the
3V mode to drive a clock signal into
3.3V logic (or 5V logic, if it accepts
a 3V signal swing), or you can use
the 300mV and 3V modes to feed in
Screen 21: the Auto screen is only one of
ten pages but encompasses and surpasses
the abilities of its predecessors. It shows
resistance, capacitance, diode polarity and
forward voltage.
Finally, we come to the modes that
can be used directly read off the values of passive components. These are
similar to the older Tweezers variants
but have wider measurement ranges.
The Auto mode performs readings
for resistors, capacitors and diodes and
displays the readings for all three. You
might get readings for more than one
component type, as there is no algorithm that will always correctly determine what has been connected.
Screen 21 shows Auto mode with
no components connected. A high
resistance and low capacitance are
displayed. In Auto mode, pressing S1
will pause the countdown timer while
S2 will resume it.
The subsequent Res, Cap and Diode
modes concentrate on just the one
component type and display it in a
larger font. These are seen on Screens
22-24, respectively.
The maximum resistance that can
be displayed depends mostly on leakage currents in the circuit. However,
above 40MW, it will not achieve the
stated 1% accuracy due to there being
insufficient resolution at this end of
the scale.
We have specified much the same
range for capacitor testing as the
The underside of the Advanced SMD Test Tweezers (shown at actual size) is
mostly empty, with only the battery holder and two diodes present.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 81
Screen 22: the Res screen provides the
same resistance information as the Auto
screen but in a larger font, which is handy
for checking and sorting through different
resistor values.
Screen 23: the Cap screen works similarly,
displaying just the measured capacitance in
large text. It’s perfect for working out which
part is which amongst a pile of unmarked
SMD capacitors.
Screen 24: the Diode screen is similar to the
diode display on the Auto screen but a bias is
applied from CON+ to CON− between tests.
This lets you quickly check the polarity and
operation of LEDs.
Improved Test Tweezers. Above these
ranges, leakage and other factors make
it difficult to achieve the stated accuracy, especially for electrolytic capacitors.
The Advanced Tweezers will report
up to 2000µF, but you should not rely
on readings above 150µF. Since this
is well above the typical range for the
MLCC (multi-layer ceramic capacitor)
types that we typically use for SMD
designs, we don’t expect this will be
much of a concern.
Remember that many capacitors are
manufactured to tolerances as wide as
±20% (and sometimes even +80,-20%).
The diode test current is higher
than the earlier Tweezers due to the
1kW test resistors. In the standalone
diode mode, the forward test current
(CON+ positive and CON− negative)
is supplied between samples, so LEDs
should be seen to light up when connected in the forward direction.
passive component measurement and
many new modes.
The PIC24FJ256GA702 is a substantial upgrade over the tiny 8-bit, 8-pin
parts we previously used; we are not
even using half of its resources or features in this design.
These new Test Tweezers can
replace a basic voltmeter, logic probe
and even oscilloscope in some situations, making them an indispensible
general-purpose test instrument.
We expect that the Advanced SMD
Test Tweezers will be both popular
and useful, not just for the numerous
test and measure modes, but also as a
SC
tool during SMD assembly.
Conclusion
The original SMD Test Tweezers
and the subsequent Updated SMD
Test Tweezers are compact and handy
devices. By adding a more powerful
and better-provisioned microcontroller, we have added numerous extra features in creating the Advanced SMD
Test Tweezers, including improved
TEST MANY COMPONENTS WITH OUR
ADVANCED
TEST T EEZERS
The Advanced Test Tweezers have 10 different modes, so you can measure
❎ Resistance: 1Ω to 40MΩ, ±1%
❎ Capacitance: 10pF to 150μF, ±5%
❎ Diode forward voltage:
0-2.4V, ±2%
❎ Combined resistance/
capacitance/diode display
❎ Voltmeter: 0 to ±30V ±2%
❎ Oscilloscope: ranges ±30V at
up to 25kSa/s
❎ Serial UART decoder
❎ I/V curve plotter
❎ Logic probe
❎ Audio tone/square wave
generator
It runs from a single CR2032 coin
cell, ~five years of standby life
Has an adjustable sleep timeout
Adjustable display brightness
The display can be rotated for leftand right-handed use
Components can be measured
in-circuit under some circumstances
Complete kit for $45 (SC6631; siliconchip.com.au/Shop/20/6631)
The kit includes everything pictured, except the lithium coin cell and optional programming header. See the series of
articles in the February & March 2023 issues for more details (siliconchip.com.au/Series/396).
82
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
SERVICEMAN’S LOG
Carpet vacuums suck, too
Dave Thompson
I don’t know what it is with vacuum cleaners and this household lately;
if it isn’t one thing, it’s another. The symptom this time was a lot like
the last – pull the trigger and nothing happens – but as it turned out, the
cause was altogether different.
After my previous repair of the Bissell AirRam, detailed
last month, everything seemed fine. However, we ran into
problems with another of our cleaning appliances. While
the ‘repair’ was simple enough, it wasn’t an overly simple
process, especially once we discovered what the problem
was. Me! Let me explain in my usual roundabout fashion...
Once a year, during the height of the summer months,
we usually do a complete wet carpet clean throughout the
house, just to spruce things up a bit. This year was no different. The problem is, last summer, we had some very
unpredictable and inclement weather. We prefer to have a
few nice consecutive sunny days to open all the windows
and thoroughly dry the carpets out after cleaning them.
As we felt we wouldn’t have that opportunity, we ended
up not doing it at all that year. However, this year, we had
to do a proper shampoo as the carpets were starting to show
their true colours!
Even this year, summer has been grey and unseasonably damp, with very few decent spells of warm weather.
We’ve seen some extreme weather in other cities around
the country (and indeed, other countries, as many of you
know all too well).
As it turned out, we were quite lucky not to have the
severe storms, rain and floods that other towns and cities
here were subjected to (and still are). We have had bursts
of finer days, though, with the ‘mercury’ in the high twenties and low thirties, so we decided to take the opportunity
to break out our wet vacuum/carpet cleaner and finally get
our carpet clean.
Once again, the machine is a Bissell appliance – we’ve
had several Bissell vacuums of different types over the
years, and all have been pretty good machines. Even though
this one is getting on a bit now, it hasn’t done a tremendous amount of work because we only shampoo the carpets once a year (or thereabouts).
Items Covered This Month
•
•
•
A carpet vacuum magic trick
Remembering core memory
Daikin three-phase aircon repair
Dave Thompson runs PC Anytime in Christchurch, NZ.
Website: www.pcanytime.co.nz
Email: dave<at>pcanytime.co.nz
Cartoonist – Louis Decrevel
Website: loueee.com
siliconchip.com.au
We try to keep the carpets clean regardless, with a ‘no
shoes in the house’ policy and only the odd pet accident
to clean up, meaning it is probably not essential they are
done every year. Still, we try to keep to that schedule.
Which brings me to my point; this machine does a lot of
sitting around doing nothing. That also means that when
we go to use it, we have to relearn how to operate it all
over again. What’s the old saying? Use it or lose it? Well,
that applies here, because the machine is relatively tricky
to use and, to get the best results, it needs to be operated
while taking all those quirks into account.
Fortunately, we keep all the user manuals (they are also
available for download on the web anyway). Since this
was the first time we’d had problems when we fired up
the machine, we had to find and dig the user manual out.
To begin with, this is a very typical carpet shampoo vacuum cleaner. They are usually quite bulky devices and relatively hard to manoeuvre, especially around corners or in
tight spaces. Ours is no different, although, to offset this
and make it more appealing to the home user, our model
boasts a removable motor assembly.
That assembly has a smaller nozzle attached so it can be
more easily used to shampoo and clean the likes of stairs
and upholstery, where the original machine would not
have a hope of reaching.
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 83
When the removable unit is ‘unplugged’ from the main
body of the cleaner, a mechanically-operated valve diverts
the water and shampoo mixture and vacuum to the small
hand-held nozzle instead of the main head unit. This
machine overall does a very good job for a domestic cleaner
and has given us good service over the years.
Rinse, lather, repeat
In these devices, a specifically measured water/shampoo
mixture is loaded into one of the two onboard tanks and
pumped down through the head assembly onto the carpet
(or upholstery) when a trigger is pressed on the operating
handle. This mixture is driven deep into the pile of the carpet in a swirling motion, due to the head’s water-jet placement and the water pump pressure.
When the carpet is well-shampooed, the trigger is
released. The mixture stops pumping out, and the machine
then essentially becomes a regular wet vacuum that pulls
all the dirty water back out of the carpets, leaving them as
dry and as clean as possible. Multiple passes are usually
required for both the shampooing and vacuuming phases
of the process.
The dirty water (usually astonishingly dark and filthy
looking) is collected and dumped into a clear plastic reservoir, which sits adjacent to the water and shampoo tank
on our particular model. Both these tanks are removable
for filling and emptying by means of clever locking levers.
Therein lies the rub
My wife got our shampooer out of the cupboard, installed
all the hoses and bits and bobs and set it all up. She filled
the tank with the correct shampoo/water mixture, plugged
it in and switched it on.
The problem she encountered was that nothing happened
when she pulled the trigger. There was none of the usual
water pump start-up noise from this machine when the
trigger was pulled, but there was still plenty of suction at
the cleaning head. Evidently, the vacuum part was working fine, but something was not quite right.
This didn’t bode well, and was all I needed after the last
vacuum-cleaner-related fiasco.
84
Silicon Chip
The first thing I did was pull both the tanks off and check
all the filters underneath. All are removable, but some only
with screwdrivers, so I went to the workshop and tooled
up for the coming disassembly.
Like all our other Bissell vacuums, this one is also as
over-engineered as a Bugatti Veyron. Everything removable is held on with many screws or bolts, making it quite
a substantial and hard-to-disassemble unit.
I hit the internet for a service manual but, as usual, found
nothing (except those for sale on some manual sites). Still, I
did find a couple of service videos on YouTube that vaguely
included this model, though not in any great detail. It did
get me up to speed on the filter checks and removals, however, so naturally, that’s where I started.
Once I got them out, I could see the filters in question
were relatively clean, with a little fine dust in some and
a few pet hairs in others, but not enough to stop it from
working. Regardless, I fired up the air compressor and gave
them all a good clean-out before refitting them.
I didn’t expect that solution to work, but I tried it anyway; still nothing. I hoped the pump hadn’t failed, because
I wasn’t sure I’d be able to get another one, at least at a reasonable price. A pump failure could make the whole thing
redundant, and it would then be just landfill fodder, a very
unpalatable option.
Time to take it apart
The only thing for it was to strip the machine down to
the pump and see what was happening. As I had no service manual, I was going in blind. That is not unusual in
my line of work, but I would rather have at least some diagrams to follow, especially if it all springs apart somewhere
and bits go flying.
I’ve been there before, trying to reassemble something
without any direction or idea of how it goes back together.
It is incredibly time-consuming and frustrating; potentially,
it might never go back together the same way. If that were
the case, I’d also have to discard it.
No pressure, then. I began by removing all the outer panels that could be removed; by past experiences, that might
not have any real benefit, but I thought I might be able to
see what was going on underneath them and find a way to
burrow down to the pump.
As is typical, the screws were very tight and some were
hard to access, but I managed to get the panels off using
several of my dozens of screwdrivers. Fortunately, there
were no security-type fasteners, as seems to be the Bissell
way, because that makes things so much harder.
Underneath, I found two other sections I needed to
remove to get to the pump, or at least where I thought
the pump was. One was particularly difficult as it seemed
to be interlocked with clips to the part next to it, but I
finally finagled it off with much blue language and gnashing of teeth.
There were also a couple of smaller filters in this area
that I could remove and check. Both were a bit grubby
but still relatively clear. I cleaned them with an old toothbrush in a bit of water and used compressed air to blow
them out anyway.
I finally found the pump, a compact self-enclosed unit,
and removed the three screws holding the assembly in
place. It spun freely, but without a service manual, I had
no idea what voltage it ran on, and as it had no visible
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
markings on it, I had no way of finding out exactly what
it was.
Another Google search showed up similar items that
looked like it, but with no specs available; I wasn’t about
to just throw power at it to test it. Frustrating!
At least it hadn’t jammed up, and while I had access, I
carefully blew the water lines going to and from the pump
through with low-pressure air to ensure everything was
clear. It all seemed as expected, so I left it at that.
Testing the trigger
At this point, I considered that the trigger mechanism
itself might be where the fault lay, and that it simply wasn’t
switching the pump in and out, so I set about disassembling
the handle assembly. This was an act in itself, with several
screws holding it together that were quite challenging to
get to, even with all my screwdrivers.
I got it apart, though, and could see all the wires and the
switch inside the handle. I used my trusty multimeter to
ring the leads out, all the way down as far as I could see,
and all seemed to be connected correctly. The trigger was
working and switching, according to the meter.
I tried ringing out the circuit all the way down to the
pump motor leads, and while I got no reading, I wasn’t
too surprised, as I knew there must be other sensors that
controlled pump operation, such as the water tank being
empty or the waste tank being full. I know this because the
user manual mentions these as safety features.
I couldn’t see these sensors in any part I had taken apart,
and I guessed they’d be situated in the pipe assemblies
somewhere beneath the tanks. Since the water tank was
full and the waste tank empty, I didn’t think it would be
one of those sensors preventing the pump from working.
In my mind, it was still looking like the pump. I found
what appeared to be a replacement unit on the web; the
model of the cleaner matched, and the picture of it looked
very similar, but I’d have to import it as there was nothing I could find locally. What a pain! And there was still
the risk that replacing the pump assembly wouldn’t fix the
problem anyway, so I held off going down that particular
route for the time being.
I still had niggling doubts about the whole deal – something seemed off about it. The cleaner had worked perfectly
the last time we’d used it, and the pump wasn’t jammed
by build-up or any foreign objects. The lines were all
clear and the wiring was intact; it just didn’t make sense
that it would stop working while sitting in the cupboard
doing nothing.
In the end, I reassembled the machine. The last thing I
wanted was to have to wait for a new pump and then forget
how it all went back together! At this point, there wasn’t
much else I could do except try to find a service manual,
or perhaps post in some online forums I had found, to find
out what the experts had to say.
Servicing Stories Wanted
Do you have any good servicing stories that you would like
to share in The Serviceman column in SILICON CHIP? If so,
why not send those stories in to us? It doesn’t matter what
the story is about as long as it’s in some way related to the
electronics or electrical industries, to computers or even to
cars and similar.
We pay for all contributions published but please note that
your material must be original. Send your contribution by
email to: editor<at>siliconchip.com.au
Please be sure to include your full name and address details.
everything back together for what I knew would be a futile
test of whether what I had done had made any difference,
she suddenly said something that made perfect sense. She
said, and I quote: “I think I put the shampoo and water in
the wrong tank.”
That did make good sense – as I mentioned, when that
waste tank is full, the pump won’t switch on, and when
the water tank is empty, the pump will not operate either.
If I’d had even an ounce of sense, I would have figured this
out before wasting all that time and expending so much
bad language chasing a ghost.
It transpired that she had forgotten how to use this
machine as much as I had, and just filled the waste tank
with the shampoo and water mixture, thinking that was
the water tank. To be fair, the water tank system is a little unintuitive; just looking at it, anyone would think the
waste tank is for water and shampoo.
Still, at the end of the day, I was the one who went all
repairman on it without looking for obvious solutions first.
We poured the mixture from the waste tank into a jug
and filled the water tank with it (pouring directly between
them was not going to work due to the design), then put
them both back in place. This time, well, you know what
happened; everything worked perfectly.
...continued on page 88
Eureka!
While I’d been doing all this, my wife was also hitting the web, trying to find anything relevant that might
help. This is not uncommon; she often looks at things I
wouldn’t think of, and vice versa, so between us, we can
usually get to the bottom of something if we look long
and hard enough.
As I was turning the last few screws in and putting
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 85
Don't pay 2-3 times as much for similar brand name
models when you don't have to.
IDEAL ENTRY LEVEL STATION
ONLY
7495
$
GREAT FOR ENTHUSIAST'S
WEEKEND PROJECTS
129
$
TS1620
TS1564
LIGHTWEIGHT IRON WITH
ADJUSTABLE TEMPERATURE
• 48 WATT
• SLIMLINE DESIGN
OUR MOST POPULAR STATION
FOR HOBBYISTS
• 48 WATT
• ANALOGUE TEMP ADJUSTMENT
MAINTAINS HEAT SETTING WITH A
HIGH DEGREE OF ACCURACY
• 65 WATT IRON
• FAST HEAT TRANSFER
• RAPID TEMP RECOVERY
• ESD SAFE
• MADE IN JAPAN
GREAT FOR EVERYDAY
ELECTRONICS ENTHUSIASTS
ONLY
189
$
TS1640
ONLY
RELIABLE OPERATION WITH EXCELLENT
TEMPERATURE STABILITY
• 65 WATT
• DIGITAL TEMP ADJUSTMENT
• ESD SAFE
• INCLUDES FULL SET OF SPARES
INCLUDING REPLACEABLE PENCIL
ONLY
339
$
TS1440
PERFECT FOR TECHNICIANS
OR ADVANCED HOBBYISTS
Explore our great range of soldering stations, in stock on
our website, or at over 110 stores or 130 resellers nationwide.
jaycar.com.au/solderstation
1800 022 888
Soldering Stations
Soldering made easy with our BEST RANGE of soldering stations
at the BEST VALUE, to suit hobbyists and professionals alike.
SOLDER OR DESOLDER
SURFACE MOUNT COMPONENTS
ONLY
299
$
TS1648
COMPLETE SOLDER/DESOLDER
STATION
• 60 WATT IRON
• 300W HOT AIR PUMP
• RAPID TEMP RECOVERY
• DUAL DIGITAL DISPLAY
• ADJUSTABLE TEMPERATURE
• ESD SAFE
Use this colour coded selection guide to pick the soldering stationthat best suits your needs.
GREEN labelled products suit hobbyists and those on a budget. BLUE suit makers who use a soldering station regularly
and need ESD protection. For advanced hobbyists or technicians, choose from the ORANGE professional range.
ENTRY LEVEL
MID LEVEL
PROFESSIONAL
TS1610
TS1620
TS1564
TS1640
TS1648
TS1440
Key Feature
Compact Design
Slimline
Ceramic Element
Digital Display
Soldering
& Hot Air
Excellent Temp Stability
& Rapid Heat Recovery
Power
(Watts)
10W
48W
48W
60W
300W
65W
Temp.
Range
100-450°C
150-450°C
150-450°C
160-480°C
50-480°C Soldering
100-500°C Hot Air
200-480°C
Display
Digital
Digital
Digital
ESD Safe
•
•
•
$189
$299
$339
Price
$39.95
$74.95
$129
*Temperature rating is set by the soldering iron tip. ESD means Electro Static Discharge
Shop Jaycar for your soldering essentials:
• 6 Soldering stations
• 12 Electric handheld irons
• Over 12 gas powered irons
• Classic 60/40, lead-free, silver & paste solder options
• Multiple desolder braid and tools
• Wide range of stands, cleaners and PCB holders
Prices correct at time of publication but are subject to change. Jaycar reserves the right to change prices if and when required.
I was kicking myself. I’m always banging on about hearing hoof beats and looking for horses, not zebras, but in
this case, I just assumed that everything was right and
there must be a fault if it wasn’t working. Thus, it is a very
cautionary tale, then, and one I’ll (hopefully) learn a lot
from. We’ll see!
Remembering core memory
R. E. of Freshwater, NSW enjoyed the article on “The
History of Computer Memory” (January 2023; siliconchip.
au/Series/393), particularly the section on magnetic core
memory.
It made me laugh, as the Australian Navy was still using
core memory as ROM in 1990 and even later. In fact, I
was informed that the bootstrap loader for the ROM was a
punched paper tape. How embarrassing!
26 years earlier, I was introduced to the obsolete technology of saturable core reactors and magnetic amplifiers
in my “Industrial and Automation Electronics” course at a
college in Toronto. We learned that if you saturate a transformer or other magnetic material, it will no longer pass
a signal from primary to secondary, but rather leave the
secondary at 0V AC.
In 1990, I was working for Bellinger Instrument Pty Ltd,
a small defence contractor in Rydalmere, Sydney. The policy of the company was that we would repair and refurbish anything that the three defence arms could throw at
us. “If it is small enough to fit in the building, we will fix
it” was the motto.
In came six boards of unknown function or use, with
absolutely no documentation and most likely security
restrictions on the system it came from. I must have been
standing in the line of fire, as I got the job of determining
what they were, their use and reverse engineering, writing
a test, and repairing any faulty boards.
I deduced that these were 32-bit core memories of
unknown capacity. With my introductions to the saturable
core reactors, I deduced that a core memory can be used to
store data. A core that has been forced into saturation with
88
Silicon Chip
an excessive current will not pass any voltage transients to
the secondary, but it will retain the received energy once
the energising current is removed.
This energy is transferred to the secondary as back-EMF
and can be measured as a several-millisecond-long pulse
in the secondary, and a shoulder in the primary voltage
directly after removing of the saturating current.
The ROM boards I had were a three-wire system, where
each toroid had three wires affecting its function. One was
a biasing wire that energised each toroid with a direct current to just below the saturation point. The second was an
address line for the 32-bit memory (or primary winding of
the toroids). The third line was the read wire or secondary winding.
By applying a pulse to the address line with enough
current to put the toroids into saturation, the read line
received a several-millisecond-long back-EMF pulse after
the address pulse was removed.
The bias and read wires are fed through the centre of the
toroids, but the address wires were fed through the centre
only for a ‘one’ bit and fed around the outside of the toroid
where they did not send it into saturation, with no backEMF pulse, for a ‘zero’ bit.
With this in mind, I developed a system to send pulses
through the all addresses, then read the ROM contents with
a sample-and-hold circuit timed to the back-EMF pulse, and
present the result to a 32-bit logic analyser as a waveform
pattern. The analyser had the capacity to recall previously
stored memory maps and compare them to new data coming
in from my ROM reader, thereby highlighting any errors.
Errors could have been caused by a broken toroid, or
one no longer able to be saturated. We found several faulty
boards and were able to get replacement toroids from the
Navy.
Then came the task of removing three wires from a
32-toroid strip and any faulty toroids, noting the in/out
sequence of the address line and rethreading three new
wires through all 32 good toroids in the noted sequence
with a needle and fine wire. Not easy task for a technician with fat fingers, as the toroids were less than 5mm
in diameter!
Without a memory map from the manufacturer, we relied
on the principle that if five boards were exactly the same,
and one was different, we had found one faulty board.
This principle had served us well in the past without any
consequences.
As a technician with limited design experience, I found
the process quite challenging, but I was able to continue
the company policy of “we can fix anything”. Unfortunately, the company was unable to continue providing these services due to changes in government policy,
resulting in insufficient work from the defence force for
small contractors.
Daikin three-phase aircon repair
K. W., of Craigburn Farm, SA found that sometimes faults
in seemingly complicated devices can be simple enough
to find and fix with just a bit of investigation. It sure beats
having to buy a whole new control board...
On a hot Sunday, my Daikin FDY “F series” three-phase
air conditioner started playing up. It gave me Error E3,
which an internet search revealed was likely due to a compressor over-pressure condition. To survive the day (and
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
keep SWMBO [she who must be obeyed] happy), I periodically sprayed the compressor cooling fins with water and
powered the unit off and then on again.
The problem was that one fan of two wasn’t running, so
the compressor was overheating. Direct sunlight on the unit
and the wall behind it didn’t help either. My wife wanted
me to call in a pro (oh, she of little faith!).
After removing a bunch of screws from the outside unit,
the top and a small front panel came off easily, exposing
the electronics for inspection and probing.
I made some measurements, then phoned an electrician
mate who has a refrigeration ticket. He came over and had
a look, but went away with the model number, expecting
to get the price of a new controller board for me. I thought
I’d investigate further.
First, I went next door, where there is an identical unit
and got my neighbour to start his air conditioner to see if
both fans ran at startup. They did.
I’d already unplugged the fans and swapped them over.
The fault didn’t follow the leads, so the fan motor was
OK, even though the winding resistances on one were a
bit higher than the other. I then swapped the leads to the
two start capacitors. No change, so they were both good.
The circuit diagram inside the cover showed that the
wire into each motor (excluding the capacitor connections)
was fed from a relay. I prised the control board out and
measured the coil resistances on all those PCB-mounted
relays and the (I think) 1kW resistors going to them. All
were roughly the same.
I thought maybe a relay had crook contacts. I’d had to
pull leads off a couple of connectors to move the PCB,
and I noticed one was very wobbly. It definitely needed
resoldering, thanks to my rough handling. That made
me wonder if any other connector solder joints were
dry/broken.
One lead to the non-working fan was near zero volts,
while on the working fan, that same lead was at 240V
AC. Between those connector pins was a copper trace. So
out with the magnifier and torch; sure enough, I found a
broken-off solder joint on one of those pins. After scraping the nearby tracks with a small cutting tool to expose
the copper, I repaired the bad joints I could see and then
touched up a few others for good measure.
Both fans were running with the power back on and the
air conditioner set to cool. Success! I put the covers back
on, and SMS’d my mate so he didn’t have to chase up a
new controller board.
The moral of the story is: if you have experience with
mains-powered equipment, have a go. The fault might be
trivial, even where a microprocessor is involved.
I felt a bit silly not suspecting a dry or broken joint in
the first place. A PCB, connector pins, and vibration are a
recipe for eventual failure.
A few years back, I fixed our front-loading washing
machine with the same type of problem. The controller
board was mounted on top of the drum!
The symptoms were intermittent wash operation. I
couldn’t see the dry joint except with a powerful magnifier; resoldering the high-current joints fixed it.
The ordinary repairman (not Dave, of course) simply
replaces controller boards at great expense and waste.
When your time is free, a deeper investigation is warranted.
SC
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 89
Vintage Radio
Three “kindred” radios from STC
By Assoc. Prof. Graham Parslow
The BGE Dapper (green), STC Pixie
(grey) and STC Bantam (red).
The sales motto for STC was “for
tone it stands alone”.
The STC parent company in the UK
was the primary supplier of English
telephone systems, and STC was the
first to use fibre optic cable for telephone transmission. STC also partnered with several US companies
under the ITT umbrella to share technology. STC merged with BGE in the
UK after World War 2. STC eventually
failed globally in 1991 due to losses
from computer manufacturing.
The history of BGE
Standard Telephones and Cables’ name was
chosen to imply that STC was the standard by
which others would be judged. That is probably
a bit of a stretch, but you can at least say that
the three Australian-made radios covered in
this article from the mid-1950s have striking
appearances that are definitely of their era.
S
TC started out in London as International Western Electric in 1883.
It became STC in 1925 when it was
taken over by ITT (International Telephone & Telegraph) of the USA. STC’s
high points were supplying the entire
radio systems for the liners Queen
Mary and Queen Elizabeth (1936-39)
and patenting pulse code modulation
(1938).
90
Silicon Chip
Their Australian operations date
from 1923, when Western Electric
set up a subsidiary in Sydney. Local
manufacturing expanded significantly
in 1936 with a new factory in Botany
Road, Sydney, employing 700 people.
Domestic radios were a minor part
of STC operations, with commercial
transmitters and military equipment
being their major activities.
Australia's electronics magazine
BGE is British General Electric, a
name created for Australian operations. The General Electric Company
(GEC) rose to be a major UK-based
industrial conglomerate producing
consumer and defence products.
From a small retail company in
1886, the company prospered through
two world wars and amalgamation
with Marconi. GEC merged with
English Electric in 1968, a company
famous for making jet aircraft like the
Canberra and Lightning. GEC operations were broken into subsidiary
companies after 2001.
In 1999, GEC was renamed Marconi.
That same year, Marconi Electronic
Systems was sold to British Aerospace
to become BAE Systems. Telecommunications giant Ericsson acquired the
bulk of the remainder of the company
in 2005.
HRSA member Peter Hughes posted
the following information about Australian operations at siliconchip.au/
link/abhi
The British General Electric Co.
started importing British-made sets
into Australia under the name Gecophone from 1924 (a portmanteau of
GEC-o-phone). The Gecophone radios
sent to Australia were manufactured at
the Coventry works (UK), which was
“equipped with the most up to date
machinery in the world”. Australian
siliconchip.com.au
A close-up of the dial used in the 1933
Genalex Dapper-5.
The chassis of the STC model A5140 ►
Bantam radio with the valves marked.
models were “minutely adapted to
suit Australian regulations and conditions”.
A complete Gecophone two-valve
radio with headphones cost £35 in
1924. Evan Murfett has described and
illustrated many of the beautifully-
presented Gecophone receivers of
1922-25 in the HRSA magazine “Radio
Waves”, in a five-part series commencing in issue 146, September 2018.
In 1929, the Australian government
imposed a high tariff on imported
radios. After 1930, BGE sets were
manufactured in Sydney by Thom and
Smith Ltd (Tasma) under the name of
Genalex. The dial of a 1933 Genalex
Dapper-5 from the author’s collection
is pictured above.
Also in 1933, the company made an
agreement with Amalgamated Wireless Valve Co. Ltd. (AWV) for valves
to be made with the Osram brand. The
Osram boxes were marked “Made in
Australia for the British General Electric Co. Ltd.”.
The brand used for radios was
changed from Genalex to BGE in 1953.
Between 1956 and 1962, BGE-branded
products were manufactured by STC
in Australia, reflecting the amalgamation of STC and BGE in the UK.
At no time was GEC (UK) affiliated
with the General Electric Company of
America. General Electric (US) had
an association with AWA in Australia, marketing badge-engineered AGE
radios that were clones of AWA radios.
by using contemporary dual-colour
plastic cases with the speaker grille
moulded into the face.
However, they are much the same
internally, with the Dapper and Bantam being identical. The case design of
the BGE Dapper is from the UK, while
the Pixie is a reproduction of an ITT
design from the USA.
The Bantam & Dapper circuit
An identical STC model 5140 chassis is used for both the Bantam and the
Dapper radios. The original circuit is
shown in Fig.1.
Although ferrite antennas were
becoming common in the mid-1950s,
these radios have a conventional aerial
coil with standard circuitry around the
12AH8 mixer valve.
The local oscillator is the Armstrong
type with a discrete coil to generate
positive feedback to sustain oscillation
(the 12AH8 triode oscillator couples
internally to the heptode grid number three).
The 9-pin 12AH8 valve is a rarity
in Australian sets. It was designed
by STC in the UK and released in
1953 under the brand Brimar, an STC
An advert from
1955 showing off
the STC Bantam
model A5140.
It has a plastic
case and was
sold with more
colour options
that those
listed in the
advertisement.
The three featured radios
The green BGE Dapper, the grey STC
Pixie and the red STC Bantam were
all current in the mid-1950s. Stylistically, they appear to be linked only
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 91
Fig.1: the circuit diagram for the STC model
5140 radio. Note that while the circuit has
been relabelled, there might be mistakes in the
values due to the poor legibility of the original
diagram. Power switch S1 is ganged to potentiometer P2 and is shown in the off position. C4 & C6 are
ganged (15-450pF). C9, C10, C12 & C13 are all 75pF.
subsidiary. The 12 prefix indicated
that the heater requires a 12V supply,
but this is a centre-tapped filament to
allow two 6.3V connections to heat
the cathode.
The 12AH8 found application in
UK and US sets with no mains transformer, using a valve series with
heater voltages that add up to the
mains voltage.
In this radio, the 12AH8 recommends itself for the high stability of
the local oscillator and high sensitivity provided. The STC service notes
for this Bantam claim that only 10µV
of signal is required for adequate
reception.
The intermediate frequency signal
at 455kHz is passed to a 6BA6 valve
for amplification. The 6BA6 was
released by RCA in 1946 and became
a popular RF amplifier globally. STC
manufactured the 6BA6 under the Brimar brand.
The resulting amplified IF signal
passes to a 6AT6 double diode-triode,
also released by RCA in 1946 and
commonly partnered with a 6BA6 IF
amplifier. The volume control (500kW)
is designated P1 and determines the
audio level fed to the 6AT6 audio preamplifier grid.
The ground return is via R14
(200W), which in theory should not
prevent the volume control from
achieving null volume. Still, in practice, most of these radios have some
small residual audio output with the
control at minimum.
The junction of R13 and R14 provides negative audio feedback from
the speaker to minimise distortion
and improve frequency response. The
sound is rather strident unless the topcut tone control (P2) is used to dampen
higher frequencies.
The 6CH6 output pentode operates
with an anode voltage of 235V, allowing it to deliver 6W or more audio output. This valve is an STC UK design
released in 1952 under the Brimar
brand and intended for video amplification rather than audio.
However, at higher volume levels,
these radios rapidly enter into distortion because the Rola 5C speaker
cannot handle much more than 2W
(2.5W in the specifications). Another
limitation to output power is the small
Rola 5kW:3.5W output transformer that
just fits in the limited space above the
speaker.
It is unfortunately common for these
An aluminium dial version of the STC
Bantam radio.
The chassis underside of the STC model 5140 (Bantam series).
92
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
Fig.2: the circuit diagram for the STC model 5162
(used in the STC Pixie) which is mostly identical
in design to the model 5140 apart from some
component changes.
small transformers to have open primaries. Replacing them with a larger
standard transformer (which is generally the only realistic option) requires
some creativity in the mounting.
The dial stringing diagram for the
Bantam and Dapper reflects a simple solution to driving a dial at the
left-hand side by a knob at the righthand side.
A long shaft across the top avoids
complex runs of string threaded
around guide pulleys. An unsophisticated timber bobbin redirects the
string movement through 90°.
The Pixie circuit
The Pixie uses an STC model 5162
chassis. Although the case design
makes this radio stand out, it is otherwise a conventional radio using
readily-available components.
At a glance, the STC 5140 and 5162
circuits (see Fig.2) are similar. The
first difference to observe is the use
of a 6BE6 mixer in the 5162 (released
by RCA in 1946), a valve choice that
is common to many Australian radios.
This valve also achieves a sensitivity
of 10μV for effective reception.
The 6BE6 sustains local oscillation
The chassis underside of the STC ►
Pixie. Compared to the STC Bantam,
it’s a lot more spacious.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
using a Hartley circuit (compared to
the Armstrong circuit in the Bantam).
The volume control is 1MW rather than
500kW in the Bantam.
Other visible differences are mainly
due to drafting choices in the circuit
diagram rather than circuit differences.
The Bantam-Dapper chassis
Thermoplastics allowed any concept to become a reality, cheaply and
in great quantity. The fifties was a
time when plastic was fantastic and
atomic energy was about to transform
Shown from left-to-right, top-to-bottom are the Bantam series of STC radios
from 1946, 1948, 1950 & 1952. Despite being part of the same series, the chassis
varied wildly between them.
Right: an example of a STC
Dapper sporting a red case
rather than the green
shown in the lead image.
Below: the rear interior
view of the STC Pixie (also
known as the STC model
5162). A clock version
of this radio was also available
(called the STC Radiotym).
the planet. It was the period that gave
us extravagant Cadillacs and radios
in every colour of the rainbow. In one
respect, it was a time like any other,
in which stylists trumped the practical requirements of engineers.
The mid-1950s STC Bantam was
created on the stylist’s drawing board.
After that, the engineers needed to
make compromises to bring the concept to reality. The large capacitors of
the day made for a cluttered layout that
is difficult to troubleshoot.
The hottest spot in the radio is
above the 6CH6 output valve, followed
closely by the 6X4 rectifier, and this
commonly cooked the plastic above
the valves. The hot spots are exacerbated by the closed design of the
back panel.
In later production, an aluminium
sheet was fitted internally as a heat
shield across the top, which did a
reasonable job of protecting the plastic case.
The Pixie is easier to work on, but
it is still cluttered.
The Bantam family of five
After the second world war, STC
catered to the market for a second
radio in the home, and the first Bantam
was a four-valve radio for the entrylevel market. The picture of the first
four Bantams shows how style and
taste changed in a decade. The 1950
model (called the ‘caravan’) and the
1952 model (called the ‘Eiffel Tower’
or ‘waterfall’) are particularly valued
by collectors.
A bit of nostalgia
Every radio can be a TARDIS (for
those Doctor Who fans) that transports us to another time and place. A
red STC Bantam from 1957 transports
me to my favourite aunt’s kitchen,
where the Bantam radio resided on
top of the fridge. That small modern
kitchen was my aunt’s pride and joy
because it was part of a bright new
cream brick house.
My uncle was a kind but stern man
who exercised his right as head of the
family to demand complete silence as
he listened to Dossier on Demetrius
and other favourites on the radio. This
was Adelaide before television, when
the radio was the entertainment and
information hub of the house. I grew
up in country SA, and it was exciting
to go to the city and see that red STC
Bantam on the fridge.
SC
94
Silicon Chip
siliconchip.com.au
CIRCUIT NOTEBOOK
Interesting circuit ideas which we have checked but not built and tested. Contributions will be paid for at
standard rates. All submissions should include full name, address & phone number.
Regenerative BFO (beat frequency oscillator) metal detector
This circuit may represent a new
concept in BFO metal detecting. It
applies a well-known principle of
radio receivers, regeneration, to a BFO,
doubling its detection range and quadrupling its sensitivity. Where a BFO
metal detector typically picks up an
old English penny at about 100mm,
this circuit will do so at about 200mm.
Since inductor L1 and the two 1nF
capacitors resist rapid changes in voltage (called reactance), any change
in the logic level at IC1e’s pin 10 is
delayed during the transfer back to
input pin 1. Propagation delays within
IC1 add further delays. The net result
is oscillation at around 170kHz, which
can be picked up by an AM radio.
Any change to the inductance of L1,
through the presence of nearby metal,
shifts the oscillator frequency. The
vital twist lies in positive feedback
(regeneration) through VR1, which I
adjusted to about 170kW.
A lead from IC1b and IC1c pins 4
and 5 needs to be attached to an AM
radio aerial. If the radio has a BFO
switch, switch it on. Due to changes
in voltage and temperature (in the circuit and radio), the tone will drift over
time, so VR1 needs to be readjusted
periodically.
Almost any coil will do. The prototype used 50 turns of 30 SWG/22 AWG
(0.315mm diameter) enamelled copper
wire, wound on a 120mm/4.7-inch former. This was then tightly wrapped in
insulation tape. This coil requires a
Faraday shield, which is connected to
0V. This is a wrapping of aluminium
foil around the coil, leaving a small
gap, so the foil does not complete the
entire circumference of the coil.
The shield is again wrapped in insulation tape. You can make a connection
to the Faraday shield by wrapping a
bare piece of stiff wire around it before
adding the tape.
Ideally, the search coil will be wired
to the circuit by a twin-core microphone cable, with the screen joined
to the Faraday shield.
The metal detector is set up by tuning the AM radio to pick up a whistle,
a harmonic of the detector's (roughly)
170kHz. Not every harmonic works
well, so the most suitable one needs
to be found; tuning the radio to about
9MHz (shortwave) produced a good
result for me. One should expect
to pick up an old English penny at
170mm as a minimum.
The Regenerative BFO metal detector will also discriminate between ferrous and non-ferrous metals through
a rise or fall in tone.
The 40106 chip used can affect performance. I used a CD40106BE (TI) initially; with a CD40106BCN (Fairchild),
the performance was just average.
Thomas Scarborough,
Capetown, South Africa. ($100)
Circuit Ideas Wanted
Got an interesting original circuit
that you have cleverly devised? We
will pay good money to feature it in
Circuit Notebook. We can pay you
by electronic funds transfer, cheque
or direct to your PayPal account. Or
you can use the funds to purchase
anything from the Silicon Chip
Online Store. Email your circuit
and descriptive text to editor<at>
siliconchip.com.au
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 95
3D-printed Robotic Arm
You can teach this Robotic Arm
a range of tasks. It has two joysticks
and a colour TFT that acts as a touchbased control panel and also shows
what's going on. The Robotic Arm can
be operated directly through Manual
Mode or taught new tasks through
Automated Mode. The robot then
repeats those tasks forever in a loop,
until you tell it to stop!
It has three degrees of freedom
(DOF) and a gripper, so four MG90S
metal gear servo motors are required.
You can see a video of it operating at
https://youtu.be/m7aQCT_xI4s
An Arduino Mega is used for the
controller as it has many I/O pins that
are needed to drive the display and
control the Arm simultaneously. Gerber files are available for the custom
interface PCB I designed to prevent a
mess of wires; you can also download
them from the Silicon Chip website.
The only specialised components
you will need are the MG90S servos, an Arduino touchscreen shield
(MCUFriend compatible; eg, Jaycar Cat
XC4630) and an Arduino Dual PS2 Joystick Breakout Module (eg, www.ebay.
com.au/itm/403015727271).
As well as the Arm being 3D printed,
I’ve designed a control panel box to
host the electronics using Tinkercad
that can also be printed.
The Robotic Arm has two modes:
Manual Mode and Automated Mode.
In Manual Mode, the Arm is directly
controlled using the two joysticks on
the control panel.
In Automated Mode, you can either
record a sequence of actions or play
back an already-recorded sequence.
When you hit the record button, you
can manoeuvre the Arm using the
joysticks and save checkpoints (or
‘savepoints’) which the Arm will later
repeat when in playback mode.
Navigation takes place using the
TFT touch display. I have made a
responsive GUI (graphical user interface), so the Robotic Arm performs
smoothly.
Since I was mainly concerned with
the logic behind the functioning of the
Arm, I used an already-available opensource robotic arm, the EEZYbotARM.
You can download the STL files for
this Arm from www.thingiverse.com/
thing:1015238, print them on a 3D
printer, and assemble them, including
the four MG90S servos. See the assembly instructions at www.instructables.
com/EEZYbotARM/ We are then ready
to move on to the electronics.
We just need to connect the servos,
the joysticks and the display to the
Arduino Mega board. The display can
be directly plugged into the Arduino,
but the other two cannot. So I designed
a custom interface PCB with headers
to make the servo connections, plus
others for connecting the jumper wire
ribbon from the joysticks can be downloaded from the Silicon Chip website.
The resulting Arduino shield can
be directly plugged into the Arduino
Mega board, with the touchscreen
plugged into the top. I added two LEDs,
one indicating power, while the other
can be controlled by the Arduino as
needed. You could build the Robotic
Arm without my PCB by connecting
everything to the Mega using flying
leads if you prefer.
I designed the control panel box in
Tinkercad, and the STL files are available to download from siliconchip.
com.au/Shop/6/132
Note that it’s designed to suit a 2.4inch touchscreen; if using a larger
one (eg, 2.8-inch), you would need to
enlarge and possibly move the screen
cutout.
I used a single module with two
joysticks for convenience, although
it would be possible to use two separate joystick modules (they are more
widely available). I have made an elevated pedestal with four screw holes in
the 3D-printed enclosure, so you just
need to screw the joystick module into
the box using the pedestals.
The box also has two cutouts for the
two ports of the Arduino Mega. The
Robotic Arm is powered using an AC/
DC adaptor; one port is for that, and
the other is the USB port to upload
code to the Arduino Mega.
We need to attach the display to the
bottom of the top lid. I used hot glue.
Now, we just need to wire up the
components. Connect the servos and
joysticks to the control module (via the
custom PCB shield, if you’re using it)
as shown in the circuit diagram. Plug
the touchscreen on top. There is a
small rectangular opening at the front
of the control panel box for the wires
going to the servos.
Note that at least six points need to
be wired to the single +5V output on
the Arduino, and also six grounds. So
if you aren’t using the custom shield
PCB, you will need to devise a method
to split out the power pins on the
Arduino to go to all those modules
and servos. For example, you could
use a pin header strip with all the pins
soldered together using a wire across
the base.
After completing the wiring, close
the top lid of the control panel box
The Joystick module for the Robotic
Arm is shown above, with the
adjacent photo showing it fitted into
an enclosure and connected to the
Arm.
96
Silicon Chip
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
using some screws. Then you can
download the control sketch from the
Silicon Chip website and upload it to
the Arduino Mega using the Arduino
siliconchip.com.au
IDE and the usual procedure.
The code spans a few thousand lines
and would be hard to comprehend,
so I have added comments to provide
Australia's electronics magazine
adequate context and help you understand the code better.
Aarav Garg,
Hyderabad, India. ($120)
March 2023 97
SILICON
CHIP
.com.au/shop
ONLINESHOP
HOW TO ORDER
INTERNET (24/7)
PAYPAL (24/7)
eMAIL (24/7)
MAIL (24/7)
PHONE – (9-5:00 AET, Mon-Fri)
siliconchip.com.au/Shop
silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
PO Box 194, MATRAVILLE, NSW 2036
(02) 9939 3295, +612 for international
You can also pay by cheque/money order (Orders by mail only) or bank transfer. Make cheques payable to Silicon Chip.
03/23
YES! You can also order or renew your Silicon Chip subscription via any of these methods as well!
The best benefit, apart from the magazine? Subscribers get a 10% discount on all orders for parts.
PRE-PROGRAMMED MICROS
For a complete list, go to siliconchip.com.au/Shop/9
$10 MICROS
$15 MICROS
24LC32A-I/SN
ATmega328P
ATmega328P-AUR
ATtiny85V-10PU
ATtiny816
PIC10F202-E/OT
PIC10LF322-I/OT
PIC12F1572-I/SN
PIC12F617-I/P
Digital FX Unit (Apr21)
Si473x FM/AM/SW Digital Radio (Jul21), 110dB RF Attenuator (Jul22)
RGB Stackable LED Christmas Star (Nov20)
Shirt Pocket Audio Oscillator (Sep20)
ATtiny816 Development/Breakout Board (Jan19)
Ultrabrite LED Driver (with free TC6502P095VCT IC, Sep19)
Range Extender IR-to-UHF (Jan22)
LED Christmas Ornaments (Nov20; versions), Nano TV Pong (Aug21)
Model Railway Level Crossing (two required – $15/pair) (Jul21)
Range Extender UHF-to-IR (Jan22), Active Mains Soft Starter (Feb23)
PIC12F617-I/SN
Model Railway Carriage Lights (Nov21)
PIC12F675-I/P
Train Chuff Sound Generator (Oct22)
PIC12F675-I/SN
Tiny LED Xmas Tree (Nov19)
PIC16F1455-I/P
Digital Lighting Controller Slave (Dec20), Auto Train Controller (Oct22)
PIC16F1455-I/SL Ol’ Timer II (Jul20), Battery Multi Logger (Feb21)
PIC16LF1455-I/P New GPS-Synchronised Analog Clock (Sep22)
PIC16F1459-I/P
Cooling Fan Controller (Feb22), Remote Mains Switch Receiver (Jul22)
PIC16F1459-I/SO Multimeter Calibrator (Jul22), Buck/Boost Charger Adaptor (Oct22)
PIC16F15214-I/SN Tiny LED Icicle (Nov22), Digital Volume Control Pot (SMD; Mar23)
PIC16F15214-I/P Digital Volume Control Pot (TH; Mar23)
PIC16F1705-I/P
Flexible Digital Lighting Controller (Oct20)
Digital Lighting Controller Translator (Dec21)
PIC16F18146-I/SO Digital Boost Regulator (Dec22)
PIC16LF15323-I/SL Remote Mains Switch Transmitter (Jul22)
W27C020
Noughts & Crosses Computer (Jan23)
ATSAML10E16A-AUT
PIC16F18877-I/P
PIC16F18877-I/PT
PIC16F88-I/P
High-Current Battery Balancer (Mar21)
USB Cable Tester (Nov21)
Dual-Channel Breadboard PSU Display Adaptor (Dec22)
Battery Charge Controller (Dec19 / Jun22)
Railway Semaphore (Apr22)
PIC24FJ256GA702-I/SS
Ohmmeter (Aug22), Advanced SMD Test Tweezers (Feb23)
PIC32MM0256GPM028-I/SS Super Digital Sound Effects (Aug18)
PIC32MX170F256D-501P/T 44-pin Micromite Mk2 (Aug14), 4DoF Simulation Seat (Sep19)
PIC32MX170F256B-50I/SP Micromite LCD BackPack V1-V3 (Feb16 / May17 / Aug19)
RCL Box (Jun20), Digital Lighting Controller Micromite Master (Nov20)
Advanced GPS Computer (Jun21), Touchscreen Digital Preamp (Sep21)
PIC32MX170F256B-I/SO
Battery Multi Logger (Feb21), Battery Manager BackPack (Aug21)
PIC32MX270F256B-50I/SP ASCII Video Terminal (Jul14), USB M&K Adaptor (Feb19)
$20 MICROS
ATmega644PA-AU
AM-FM DDS Signal Generator (May22)
dsPIC33FJ64MC802-E/SP
dsPIC33FJ128GP306-I/PT
PIC32MX470F512H-I/PT
PIC32MX470F512H-120/PT
PIC32MX470F512L-120/PT
1.5kW Induction Motor Speed Controller (Aug13)
CLASSiC DAC (Feb13)
Stereo Echo/Reverb (Feb 14), Digital Effects Unit (Oct14)
Micromite Explore 64 (Aug 16), Micromite Plus (Nov16)
Micromite Explore 100 (Sep16)
$25 MICROS
$30 MICROS
PIC32MX695F512H-80I/PT Touchscreen Audio Recorder (Jun14)
PIC32MZ2048EFH064-I/PT DSP Crossover/Equaliser (May19), Low-Distortion DDS (Feb20)
DIY Reflow Oven Controller (Apr20), Dual Hybrid Supply (Feb22)
KITS, SPECIALISED COMPONENTS ETC
DIGITAL VOLUME CONTROL POTENTIOMETER
(MAR 23)
SMD version kit: includes all relevant parts except the
universal remote control and activity LED (Cat SC6623)
$60.00
Through-hole version kit: includes all relevant parts (with SMD PGA2311) except
the universal remote control and activity LED (Cat SC6624)
$70.00
ACTIVE MAINS SOFT STARTER
(FEB 23)
Hard-to-get parts: includes the PCB, transformer, relay, thermistor, programmed
micro and all other semiconductors (Cat SC6575; see page 41, February 2023) $100.00
ADVANCED SMD TEST TWEEZERS KIT (CAT SC6631)
(FEB 23)
RASPBERRY PI PICO W BACKPACK
(JAN 23)
Includes all parts (except coin cell and CON1) (see page 51, February 2023)
Complete kit: includes all parts in the parts list, except the DS3231
real-time clock IC (Cat SC6625; see page 56, January 2023)
- DS3231 real-time clock SOIC-16 IC (Cat SC5103)
- DS3231MZ real-time clock SOIC-8 IC (Cat SC5779)
Q METER SHORT-FORM KIT (CAT SC6585)
$45.00
$85.00
$7.50
$10.00
(JAN 23)
Includes the PCB, all required onboard parts (excluding optional debug interface)
and the front panel. Just add a signal source, case, power supply and wiring
$100.00
DUAL-CHANNEL BREADBOARD PSU
(DEC 22)
Power Supply kit: complete kit with a choice of red + green, yellow + cyan
or orange + white knob colours (Cat SC6571; see page 38, December 2022)
Display Adaptor kit: complete kit (Cat SC6572; see page 45, December 2022)
$40.00
$50.00
DIGITAL BOOST REGULATOR KIT (CAT SC6597)
(DEC 22)
LC METER MK3
(NOV 22)
NEW GPS(/WIFI)-SYNCHRONISED ANALOG CLOCK
(SEP & NOV 22)
Complete kit that also includes all optional components (see page 87, Dec22)
Short Form Kit: includes the PCB and all non-optional onboard parts, except
the case, front panel label and power supply (Cat SC6544)
$30.00
$65.00
GPS-version kit: includes everything in the parts list with the VK2828 GPS module
(Cat SC6472; see September 2022 p63)
$55.00
WiFi-version kit: includes everything in the parts list with the D1 Mini module instead
(Cat SC6472; D1 Mini is supplied not programmed, see November 2022 p76)
$55.00
siliconchip.com.au/Shop/
- VK2828U7G5LF GPS module with antenna and cable (Cat SC3362)
$25.00
BUCK/BOOST CHARGER ADAPTOR KIT (CAT SC6512)
(OCT 22)
MINI LED DRIVER (CAT SC6405)
(SEP 22)
WiFi PROGRAMMABLE DC LOAD
(SEP 22)
Includes everything in the parts list (see page 64, October 2022)
except the Buck/Boost LED Driver (see adjacent; Cat SC6292)
Complete Kit: includes everything in the parts list
$40.00
Short Form Kit: includes all SMDs, the power Mosfets, four 0.02W 3W resistors
and the VXO7805 regulator module (Cat SC6399)
- laser-cut 3mm clear acrylic side panel (SC6514)
- 3.5-inch TFT LCD touchscreen (Cat SC5062)
$25.00
$85.00
$7.50
$35.00
WIDE-RANGE OHMMETER (CAT SC4663)
(AUG 22)
VGA PICOMITE KIT (CAT SC6417)
(JUL 22)
MULTIMETER CALIBRATOR KIT (CAT SC6406)
(JUL 22)
BUCK-BOOST LED DRIVER KIT (CAT SC6292)
(JUN 22)
SPECTRAL SOUND MIDI SYNTH KIT (CAT SC6261)
(JUN 22)
500W AMPLIFIER HARD-TO-GET PARTS (CAT SC6019)
(APR 22)
HUMMINGBIRD AMPLIFIER (CAT SC6021)
(DEC 21)
Partial Kit: includes the PCB, programmed micro, all SMDs, most semiconductors,
PPS capacitors and calibration resistors
$75.00
- 16x2 alphanumeric LCD with blue backlighting (Cat 5759)
$10.00
Complete kit with everything needed to assemble the board, you just require a few
external parts such as a power supply, keyboard and monitor
$35.00
Complete kit with everything needed to assemble the board
Complete kit with everything needed to assemble the board
Complete kit including all programmed PICs (no case or power supply)
$45.00
$80.00
$200.00
All the parts marked with a red dot in the parts list, including the 12 output transistors,
driver transistors, VAS transistors, input pair (2SA1312), BAV21 & UF4003 diodes,
TL431 ICs, 75pF capacitor, E96 series resistors and 10kW 1W resistor
$180.00
Hard-to-get parts includes: two 0.22W 5W resistors; plus one each of an
MJE15034G, MJE15035G, KSC3503DS & 220pF 250V C0G ceramic capacitor
*Prices valid for month of magazine issue only. All prices in Australian dollars and include GST where applicable. # Overseas? Place an order on our website for a quote.
$15.00
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS & CASE PIECES
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TO SUIT PROJECT
THERMAL REGULATOR INTERFACE SHIELD
↳ PELTIER DRIVER SHIELD
DIY REFLOW OVEN CONTROLLER (SET OF 3 PCBS)
7-BAND MONO EQUALISER
↳ STEREO EQUALISER
REFERENCE SIGNAL DISTRIBUTOR
H-FIELD TRANSANALYSER
CAR ALTIMETER
RCL BOX RESISTOR BOARD
↳ CAPACITOR / INDUCTOR BOARD
ROADIES’ TEST GENERATOR SMD VERSION
↳ THROUGH-HOLE VERSION
COLOUR MAXIMITE 2 PCB (BLUE)
↳ FRONT & REAR PANELS (BLACK)
OL’ TIMER II PCB (RED, BLUE OR BLACK)
↳ ACRYLIC CASE PIECES / SPACER (BLACK)
IR REMOTE CONTROL ASSISTANT PCB (JAYCAR)
↳ ALTRONICS VERSION
USB SUPERCODEC
↳ BALANCED ATTENUATOR
SWITCHMODE 78XX REPLACEMENT
WIDEBAND DIGITAL RF POWER METER
ULTRASONIC CLEANER MAIN PCB
↳ FRONT PANEL
NIGHT KEEPER LIGHTHOUSE
SHIRT POCKET AUDIO OSCILLATOR
↳ 8-PIN ATtiny PROGRAMMING ADAPTOR
D1 MINI LCD WIFI BACKPACK
FLEXIBLE DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLLER SLAVE
↳ FRONT PANEL (BLACK)
LED XMAS ORNAMENTS
30 LED STACKABLE STAR
↳ RGB VERSION (BLACK)
DIGITAL LIGHTING MICROMITE MASTER
↳ CP2102 ADAPTOR
BATTERY VINTAGE RADIO POWER SUPPLY
DUAL BATTERY LIFESAVER
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLLER LED SLAVE
BK1198 AM/FM/SW RADIO
MINIHEART HEARTBEAT SIMULATOR
I’M BUSY GO AWAY (DOOR WARNING)
BATTERY MULTI LOGGER
ELECTRONIC WIND CHIMES
ARDUINO 0-14V POWER SUPPLY SHIELD
HIGH-CURRENT BATTERY BALANCER (4-LAYERS)
MINI ISOLATED SERIAL LINK
REFINED FULL-WAVE MOTOR SPEED CONTROLLER
DIGITAL FX UNIT PCB (POTENTIOMETER-BASED)
↳ SWITCH-BASED
ARDUINO MIDI SHIELD
↳ 8X8 TACTILE PUSHBUTTON SWITCH MATRIX
HYBRID LAB POWER SUPPLY CONTROL PCB
↳ REGULATOR PCB
VARIAC MAINS VOLTAGE REGULATION
ADVANCED GPS COMPUTER
PIC PROGRAMMING HELPER 8-PIN PCB
↳ 8/14/20-PIN PCB
ARCADE MINI PONG
Si473x FM/AM/SW DIGITAL RADIO
20A DC MOTOR SPEED CONTROLLER
MODEL RAILWAY LEVEL CROSSING
COLOUR MAXIMITE 2 GEN2 (4 LAYERS)
BATTERY MANAGER SWITCH MODULE
↳ I/O EXPANDER
NANO TV PONG
LINEAR MIDI KEYBOARD (8 KEYS) + 2 JOINERS
↳ JOINER ONLY (1pc)
TOUCHSCREEN DIGITAL PREAMP
↳ RIBBON CABLE / IR ADAPTOR
2-/3-WAY ACTIVE CROSSOVER
TELE-COM INTERCOM
SMD TEST TWEEZERS (3 PCB SET)
USB CABLE TESTER MAIN PCB
DATE
MAR20
MAR20
APR20
APR20
APR20
APR20
MAY20
MAY20
JUN20
JUN20
JUN20
JUN20
JUL20
JUL20
JUL20
JUL20
JUL20
JUL20
AUG20
NOV20
AUG20
AUG20
SEP20
SEP20
SEP20
SEP20
SEP20
OCT20
OCT20
OCT20
NOV20
NOV20
NOV20
NOV20
NOV20
DEC20
DEC20
DEC20
JAN21
JAN21
JAN21
FEB21
FEB21
FEB21
MAR21
MAR21
APR21
APR21
APR21
APR21
APR21
MAY21
MAY21
MAY21
JUN21
JUN21
JUN21
JUN21
JUL21
JUL21
JUL21
AUG21
AUG21
AUG21
AUG21
AUG21
AUG21
SEP21
SEP21
OCT21
OCT21
OCT21
NOV21
PCB CODE
Price
21109181
$5.00
21109182
$5.00
01106193/5/6 $12.50
01104201
$7.50
01104202
$7.50
CSE200103 $7.50
06102201
$10.00
05105201
$5.00
04104201
$7.50
04104202
$7.50
01005201
$2.50
01005202
$5.00
07107201
$10.00
SC5500
$10.00
19104201
$5.00
SC5448
$7.50
15005201
$5.00
15005202
$5.00
01106201
$12.50
01106202
$7.50
18105201
$2.50
04106201
$5.00
04105201
$7.50
04105202
$5.00
08110201
$5.00
01110201
$2.50
01110202
$1.50
24106121
$5.00
16110202
$20.00
16110203
$20.00
16111191-9 $3.00
16109201
$12.50
16109202
$12.50
16110201
$5.00
16110204
$2.50
11111201
$7.50
11111202
$2.50
16110205
$5.00
CSE200902A $10.00
01109201
$5.00
16112201
$2.50
11106201
$5.00
23011201
$10.00
18106201
$5.00
14102211
$12.50
24102211
$2.50
10102211
$7.50
01102211
$7.50
01102212
$7.50
23101211
$5.00
23101212
$10.00
18104211
$10.00
18104212
$7.50
10103211
$7.50
05102211
$7.50
24106211
$5.00
24106212
$7.50
08105211
$35.00
CSE210301C $7.50
11006211
$7.50
09108211
$5.00
07108211
$15.00
11104211
$5.00
11104212
$2.50
08105212
$2.50
23101213
$5.00
23101214
$1.00
01103191
$12.50
01103192
$2.50
01109211
$15.00
12110121
$30.00
04106211/2 $10.00
04108211
$7.50
For a complete list, go to siliconchip.com.au/Shop/8
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TO SUIT PROJECT
↳ FRONT PANEL (GREEN)
MODEL RAILWAY CARRIAGE LIGHTS
HUMMINGBIRD AMPLIFIER
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLLER TRANSLATOR
SMD TRAINER
8-LED METRONOME
10-LED METRONOME
REMOTE CONTROL RANGE EXTENDER UHF-TO-IR
↳ IR-TO-UHF
6-CHANNEL LOUDSPEAKER PROTECTOR
↳ 4-CHANNEL
FAN CONTROLLER & LOUDSPEAKER PROTECTOR
SOLID STATE TESLA COIL (SET OF 2 PCBs)
REMOTE GATE CONTROLLER
DUAL HYBRID POWER SUPPLY SET (2 REGULATORS)
↳ REGULATOR
↳ FRONT PANEL
↳ CPU
↳ LCD ADAPTOR
↳ ACRYLIC LCD BEZEL
RASPBERRY PI PICO BACKPACK
AMPLIFIER CLIPPING DETECTOR
CAPACITOR DISCHARGE WELDER POWER SUPPLY
↳ CONTROL PCB
↳ ENERGY STORAGE MODULE (ESM) PCB
500W AMPLIFIER
MODEL RAILWAY SEMAPHORE CONTROL PCB
↳ SIGNAL FLAG (RED)
AM-FM DDS SIGNAL GENERATOR
SLOT MACHINE
HIGH-POWER BUCK-BOOST LED DRIVER
ARDUINO PROGRAMMABLE LOAD
SPECTRAL SOUND MIDI SYNTHESISER
REV. UNIVERSAL BATTERY CHARGE CONTROLLER
VGA PICOMITE
SECURE REMOTE MAINS SWITCH RECEIVER
↳ TRANSMITTER (1.0MM THICKNESS)
MULTIMETER CALIBRATOR
110dB RF ATTENUATOR
WIDE-RANGE OHMMETER
WiFi PROGRAMMABLE DC LOAD MAIN PCB
↳ DAUGHTER BOARD
↳ CONTROL BOARD
MINI LED DRIVER
NEW GPS-SYNCHRONISED ANALOG CLOCK
BUCK/BOOST CHARGER ADAPTOR
30V 2A BENCH SUPPLY MAIN PCB
↳ FRONT PANEL CONTROL PCB
AUTO TRAIN CONTROLLER
↳ TRAIN CHUFF SOUND GENERATOR
PIC16F18xxx BREAKOUT BOARD (DIP-VERSION)
↳ SOIC-VERSION
AVR64DD32 BREAKOUT BOARD
LC METER MK3
↳ ADAPTOR BOARD
DC TRANSIENT SUPPLY FILTER
TINY LED ICICLE (WHITE)
DUAL-CHANNEL BREADBOARD PSU
↳ DISPLAY BOARD
DIGITAL BOOST REGULATOR
ACTIVE MONITOR SPEAKERS POWER SUPPLY
PICO W BACKPACK
Q METER MAIN PCB
↳ FRONT PANEL (BLACK)
NOUGHTS & CROSSES COMPUTER GAME BOARD
↳ COMPUTE BOARD
ACTIVE MAINS SOFT STARTER
ADVANCED SMD TEST TWEEZERS SET
DATE
NOV21
NOV21
DEC21
DEC21
DEC21
JAN22
JAN22
JAN22
JAN22
JAN22
JAN22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
FEB22
MAR22
MAR22
MAR22
MAR22
MAR22
APR22
APR22
APR22
MAY22
MAY22
JUN22
JUN22
JUN22
JUN22
JUL22
JUL22
JUL22
JUL22
JUL22
AUG22
SEP22
SEP22
SEP22
SEP22
SEP22
OCT22
OCT22
OCT22
OCT22
OCT22
OCT22
OCT22
OCT22
NOV22
NOV22
NOV22
NOV22
DEC22
DEC22
DEC22
DEC22
JAN23
JAN23
JAN23
JAN23
JAN23
FEB23
FEB23
PCB CODE
04108212
09109211
01111211
16110206
29106211
23111211
23111212
15109211
15109212
01101221
01101222
01102221
26112211/2
11009121
SC6204
18107211
18107212
01106193
01106196
SC6309
07101221
01112211
29103221
29103222
29103223
01107021
09103221
09103222
CSE211002
08105221
16103221
04105221
01106221
04107192
07107221
10109211
10109212
04107221
CSE211003
04109221
04108221
04108222
18104212
16106221
19109221
14108221
04105221
04105222
09109221
09109222
24110222
24110225
24110223
CSE220503C
CSE200603
08108221
16111192
04112221
04112222
24110224
01112221
07101221
CSE220701
CSE220704
08111221
08111222
10110221
04106221/2
Price
$5.00
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$5.00
$5.00
$7.50
$2.50
$2.50
$7.50
$5.00
$5.00
$7.50
$20.00
$25.00
$7.50
$2.50
$5.00
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$5.00
$25.00
$2.50
$2.50
$7.50
$5.00
$5.00
$5.00
$7.50
$7.50
$5.00
$7.50
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$7.50
$7.50
$5.00
$10.00
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$7.50
$2.50
$2.50
$2.50
$2.50
$2.50
$2.50
$7.50
$2.50
$5.00
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$5.00
$10.00
$5.00
$5.00
$5.00
$12.50
$12.50
$10.00
$10.00
DIGITAL VOLUME CONTROL POT (SMD VERSION)
↳ THROUGH-HOLE VERSION
MODEL RAILWAY TURNTABLE CONTROL PCB
↳ CONTACT PCB (GOLD-PLATED)
MAR23
MAR23
MAR23
MAR23
01101231
01101232
09103231
09103232
$2.50
$5.00
$5.00
$10.00
NEW PCBs
We also sell the Silicon Chip PDFs on USB, RTV&H USB, Vintage Radio USB and more at siliconchip.com.au/Shop/3
ASK SILICON CHIP
Got a technical problem? Can’t understand a piece of jargon or some technical principle? Drop us a line
and we’ll answer your question. Send your email to silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
Changing active
loudspeakers to passive
Can your Active Monitor Loudspeakers (November & December 2022;
siliconchip.au/Series/390) be built as
a passive system with the addition of
an appropriate crossover, to be driven
by a 60W amplifier while the rest of
the electronics is built? Can you suggest a design for the crossover? (P. K.,
Merewether, NSW)
● The monitors could possibly be
built and set to work with a passive
crossover. The question is how much
effort and money you want to put into
making the crossover as a stopgap
while you build the Active Crossover
Amplifier.
The active crossover design removes
a lot of complexity and expense in the
crossover and allows you to tweak the
balance of the drivers. It also provides
superb control over the drivers. Designing an optimal passive crossover is not
trivial; outside the simple job of choosing the parts to get the desired crossover
frequency, there is invariably quite a
process in tweaking the response.
Also, one would often take a different approach in designing speakers
to use a passive crossover rather than
an active one. For example, selecting
drivers with a large overlap in their
operating frequency ranges to avoid
needing a steep and, thus, a more complicated crossover network. So it isn’t
just a simple matter of substituting one
for the other.
You could use a “cookbook” to build
a first- or second-order crossover as a
temporary measure, but we are confident you will get a sub-optimal result.
The drivers in this project are very
high quality and quite expensive. We
think you will want to get the best from
them. We would be inclined to get on
with building the Active Crossover
Amplifier; it isn’t all that hard once
you’ve gathered the parts.
If you really want to experiment,
the following is a starting point. Aim
for a crossover point of about 2.7kHz.
We used a fourth-order crossover, but
100
Silicon Chip
we strongly advise against building a
fourth-order passive crossover as that
would be very complex and expensive. A second-order crossover is a
more reasonable starting point. The
tweeter attenuation would need to be
in the region of 4-5dB.
Bridging Hummingbird
Amps and transformers
I have a 30-0-30V AC 300VA toroidal
transformer. I expected to get ±45V DC
rails, but when I measure them with a
DMM, I get approximately ±42V with
one bridge rectifier. I plan to run dual
rectifiers giving a proper 100Hz supply with a star Earth point. Which
components do I need to change for
this to power Hummingbird amplifiers (December 2021; siliconchip.au/
Article/15126)?
I plan to run four modules with
pairs of modules bridged to give stereo
outputs. What values and parts need
adjusting? Should I change the biasing? (B. C., Albion, Vic)
● Phil Prosser responds: We have a
few things in the question to tease out.
With a 2 × 30V AC transformer, you
will get rails of 30V × √2 minus a diode
drop, ie, 30V × 1.414 − 0.6V unloaded,
or 41.8V in an ideal world. Given the
Australian mains tolerance of -6%
to +10%, your measured 42V is well
within the expected range.
That +10% on mains voltages means
we need to design all our circuits to
handle those times when you have
high voltages. This can present a real
design constraint.
As recommended in the Active
Monitor Speaker article (December
2022; siliconchip.au/Article/15585),
a bridge rectifier driven by your 30
+ 30V AC transformer will full-wave
rectify the transformer output, resulting in the reservoir capacitors being
charged at 100Hz intervals.
There is no significant need for two
rectifiers; indeed, the design presented
in that issue uses one rectifier for four
(or six) modules. The most important
things to worry about are:
Australia's electronics magazine
• Getting the Earthing right. That
article shows how to do this. Pay attention to the wiring instructions and
note that the power supply board has
a massive ground plane and a very low
impedance star point.
• Sufficient filter bank capacity.
Our power supply board has room for
three large electrolytic capacitors per
rail. As noted in the article, a minimum of 6800μF per capacitor seems
reasonable.
You can run Hummingbird amplifiers in bridge mode. Use a 25 + 25V
AC transformer, giving ±35V rails. You
can only run this configuration into 8W
speakers in bridge mode.
If you have a very good power supply with good filtering, you will be
able to deliver close to 200W (double
the rated 4W output power) into those
8W speakers.
Say you only have a 2 × 30V AC
transformer, and your speakers are not
very low impedance (4W or more). In
that case, I recommend you use one
Hummingbird Amplifier per channel
with plenty of power supply filtering
capacitors. That will deliver close to
100W into each channel, more than
enough for domestic use.
That would be safer and cheaper
than bridging, with less cost and only
a minor impact on the actual power
delivery. I would not change the biasing of the amplifier from that recommended in the article. If you follow the
above advice, you should not need to
change any components on the amplifier modules.
Modified bench supply
dropping its bundle
I have built a single-channel version of the Hybrid Power Supply (February & March 2022; siliconchip.au/
Series/377) with potentiometer controls for voltage and amperage, rather
than the digital controls of the published design.
Unfortunately, it sees a load of anything less than about 10W as a dead
short and invokes the safety cutout.
siliconchip.com.au
For example, I cannot light a 12V
automotive globe as the cold filament
resistance is too low. This makes the
power supply less useful.
Ideally, the cutout resistance should
be adjustable or more precisely controllable. I want to avoid the complexity of complete digital control. Can you
assist? (C. D., Adelaide, SA)
● From what we can make out, there is
a problem in the current sense part of
what you have built. We’re assuming
that the voltage regulation part works
and you can control output voltage
into no load from zero volts upwards
using a potentiometer on CON5 (with
the clockwise end of the track to pin
1 and wiper to pin 2).
Note that you must have a similarly
connected pot on CON6, and this must
be set to provide a reasonable voltage
to the current limit set input at pin 2.
Otherwise, the current limit will be
zero (or, depending on the input offset of IC3a, it could even shut down).
The current limit circuit is very conventional and operates as a limiter, not
a cutout. This functions by the INA282
sensing the output current and presenting this to pin 3 of IC3a.
IC3a acts as a comparator, so if your
current limit set is greater than the
current sensed by the INA282, IC3a’s
output switches off Q5, and the power
supply operates in voltage-control
mode. If the current drawn exceeds
the limit, the comparator starts to bias
Q5 on. After that, at some point, the
sensed output current falls below the
set current, and Q5 begins to turn off.
This implements a current-
control
mode.
So if you have set the current limit
to, say, 5A, then connect a 1W resistor, you will get 5V across it. It does
not ‘shut down’.
Assuming you have normal voltage
regulation, check that you have a linear potentiometer of, say, 1kW (this is
not that critical) on the “Iset” header,
then check that pin 2 of IC3a has a positive voltage that is controlled by your
potentiometer. Pin 1 of IC3a should
have a negative voltage, close to -4.5V.
Measure the voltage on pin 3 of IC3a.
This is the output of the INA282 and
is the sensed current. With no load on
the PSU, this should be close to 0V
and will go positive at higher output
currents. If there is no current limiting
happening, the base of Q5 should be
very close to the -4.5V rail. During current limiting, this will increase until
Q5 turns on at about -3.9V.
If all the above checks are OK, the
current limit on this power supply
should be operating normally.
We don’t know how large of a 12V
bulb you are testing on. If you are
using a very high-wattage bulb, your
cold resistance may be a fraction of an
ohm. When hot, the resistance could
be over 2W, so cold, it will be well
under 1W. If you have set the current
limit to 5A, you should see the power
supply deliver this current, initially at
1V or so, increasing as the bulb heats.
If your current limit is set too low,
the bulb temperature could stabilise
at a low output voltage.
If you dial that current limit voltage
to 5V, the current limit will be way
over 5A, and the power supply will
try to deliver a substantial current.
However, the MC33167/MC34167 has
cycle-by-cycle current limiting that
will kick in at a bit over 5A.
Material entering the
public domain
I would like to know when the older
publications you hold copyright on
will enter the public domain according to Australian Copyright Law. Do
you retain the copyright for all of your
authors? Are they surviving within the
70-year limit? 1955 appears to be the
cutoff date as a maximum.
As a result of changes to the rules in
2005, copyright has expired for works
where the creator died before 1 January
1955 and the work was made public
before 1 January 1955. Before 2005, the
general period of copyright was the life
of the author plus 50 years.
In January 2005, the Australian law
relating to the duration of copyright in
works was amended as part of Australia’s Free Trade Agreement with the
USA, to extend the general period of
copyright from the life of the author
plus 50 years to the life of the author
plus 70 years. This extended term of
copyright applied to material still in
copyright on 1 January 2005.
However, if the copyright had
expired by 1 January 2005, copyright
was not revived (unlike in the UK)
– see siliconchip.au/link/abjl (J. W.,
Berwick, Vic)
● This is a good question but difficult
to answer. If you want to reproduce
part or all of one of our publications
without permission, to be sure to avoid
infringing our copyright, you would
need to perform extensive research to
determine if it is in the public domain.
This is one of the (many) disadvantages of how copyright law is written.
An alternative would be to ask us
for permission if you have a specific
use in mind.
As you point out, works published
before 1955 might be in the public
domain, but it is not guaranteed. For
articles by a specific author, you need
to find out when they died and add 50
Raspberry Pi Pico W BackPack
The new Raspberry Pi Pico W provides WiFi functionality, adding
to the long list of features. This easy-to-build device includes a
3.5-inch touchscreen LCD and is programmable in BASIC, C or
MicroPython, making it a good general-purpose controller.
This kit comes with everything needed to build a Pico W BackPack module, including
components for the optional microSD card, IR receiver and stereo audio output.
$85 + Postage ∎ Complete Kit (SC6625)
siliconchip.com.au/Shop/20/6625
The circuit and assembly instructions were published in the January 2023 issue: siliconchip.au/Article/15616
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 101
years to that date. If the resulting date
is in the past, the work is in the public
domain. You have to be careful as one
author’s work may contain the work
of another (eg, photos, diagrams etc).
For pages without a specific or
known author, we think it is reasonable to assume they are in the public
domain if published before 1955.
Since magazines have numerous
authors, it seems they would not enter
the public domain all at once because
the copyright obtained from the author
by the magazine for each article is
linked to that author’s lifespan. Some
pages might have entered the public
domain, while others remain copyrighted. 50-70 years after all authors
have died, the entire work enters the
public domain.
Making matters even more confusing, we do not know if all the authors
published in early magazines transferred their copyright over to the publication. If they still hold the copyright
on their work, even if we decided to
say that a particular issue was now in
the public domain (or that we wouldn’t
enforce copyright), those authors
could still possibly take legal action.
It’s a real can of worms!
Many early magazines do not have
a very good masthead or contents
page, and you have to go through all
the pages to see who wrote the articles. Many of the articles do not even
have a byline.
Radio, TV & Hobbies ran from April
1939 to March 1965, so there was
nearly 16 years’ worth of issues before
January 1955. If the authors of articles
in those issues died before 1955, their
articles would be in the public domain.
It is unlikely that all the authors of
the articles in the April 1939 issue
died before January 1955, so we doubt
that any single issue is in the public
domain in its entirety yet.
For example, John Moyle was the
technical editor of Radio, TV & Hobbies from the first issue (April 1939)
until the 1960s. We suspect he was
also involved before April 1939, when
the magazine had a different name. He
passed away in 1960, so any articles
with his name attached will not be in
the public domain yet.
We are sorry we can’t help more. The
fact is that even we do not fully know
the exact copyright status of many of
‘our’ publications, mainly those that
came before Silicon Chip. We would
prefer that copyright laws were better
102
Silicon Chip
defined (eg, based on a fixed period
since publication rather than the lifespan of the authors), but that is out of
our control.
Using 2.2kW pot in
Bench Supply
Can I use a 2.2kW multi-turn pot
instead of the much more expensive 2.5kW potentiometer in the 30V
2A Bench Supply design (October
& November 2022; siliconchip.au/
Series/389)? I could include a 300W
1W resistor in series and switch it
in or out to retain the range. (D. R.,
Dianella, WA)
● Yes, you could do that, but it would
not be as convenient as using a 2.5kW
potentiometer.
A better way around the voltage
range problem when using a 2.2kW
potentiometer is to reduce the resistance between the adjust and output
pins of the LM317 regulator. Reduce
it sufficiently to get the full 30V when
the potentiometer is set at maximum
resistance. A 1.1kW resistor in parallel
with the original 100W should work,
and the series 300W resistor would not
be required.
Building the DAB+/FM/
AM Tuner
I am keen to know if an updated version of the DAB+/FM/AM tuner has
been developed (January-March 2019;
siliconchip.au/Series/330). How do I
purchase the kit? (T. L., South Africa)
● That is the latest DAB+ radio we’ve
published and the only one that can
still be built. The first article in the
January 2019 issue has the circuit diagram and explains how it works and
what it does. Part two in the February
2019 issue has the parts list and PCB
assembly instructions, while part three
in the March 2019 issue includes final
assembly, software set-up and use.
We think you would need the February & March 2019 issues to build it;
otherwise, there would be too much
guesswork. They are available via our
website.
The design is quite complicated, so
you should read the article(s) before
going too much further. It involves
building the Explore 100 microcontroller module, attaching a five-inch
touchscreen, then building the DAB+
custom PCB and putting it all together
in the optional case.
Australia's electronics magazine
We can supply many of the parts,
but not all of them (siliconchip.au/
Shop/?article=11444).
Parts we sell include a kit for the
Explore 100 with everything except
the touchscreen, the DAB+/FM/AM
radio PCB, two sets of parts for that
PCB (one with radio chip IC1 and its
surrounding components, the other
with all the remaining SMDs), plus
some bits and pieces like the antenna,
antenna connectors and RCA sockets.
Building both boards (Explore 100
and DAB+/FM/AM) involves soldering some SMDs, including a QFN
IC and fairly small passives, so you
should be confident in your SMD
soldering skills before tackling this
project.
Multi-Spark CDI crossfire prevention
I have skimmed the High-Energy
Multi-Spark CDI articles (December
2014 & January 2015; siliconchip.au/
Series/279) and saw comments that
there is some potential problem with
6- and 8-cylinder engines cross-firing.
I plan to install one on an old 1986
6-cylinder engine. I appreciate that it is
a precautionary comment but is there
anything I should consider to avoid
this? (R. L., Robina, Qld)
● That wording is to inform you know
that the high-tension (spark plug)
leads need to be spaced apart to prevent cross-fire between cylinders due
to capacitive coupling if they are too
close. Take care with routing the spark
plug leads and you should not have
any cross-fire problems.
Multi-Spark CDI draws
too much current
I have built your Multi-Spark CDI
but have encountered some problems.
When I plug the CDI in, it immediately
draws 4A but will not spark. I measured 300V across the 1μF capacitor
and noticed that Q3 gets extremely hot,
and even appears to spark. There is no
excess solder around Q3; I did check
that. What could be causing this? I
have attached some pictures. (J. M.,
New Haven, CT, USA)
● Is D4 actually a UF4007? It looks like
a 1N4148, but the photo is a little too
blurry for us to be sure. Q3 will get hot
if the 1μF X2 capacitor is shorted or
if it breaks down at 300V. There may
continued on page 104
siliconchip.com.au
MARKET CENTRE
Advertise your product or services here in Silicon Chip
KIT ASSEMBLY & REPAIR
FOR SALE
DAVE THOMPSON
(the Serviceman from
Silicon Chip) is available to help you with
kit assembly, project
troubleshooting, general electronics and
custom design work.
No job too small. Based in Christchurch,
New Zealand, but service available Australia/NZ wide.
Email dave<at>davethompson.co.nz
LEDsales
KEITH RIPPON KIT ASSEMBLY &
REPAIR:
* Australia & New Zealand;
* Small production runs.
Phone Keith: 0409 662 794
keith.rippon<at>gmail.com
LEDs and accessories
for the DIY enthusiast
LEDs, BRAND NAME AND GENERIC
LEDs. Heatsinks, LED drivers, power
supplies, LED ribbon, kits, components,
hardware – www.ledsales.com.au
PCB MANUFACTURE: single to multilayer. Bare board tested. One-offs to
any quantity. 48 hour service. Artwork
design. Excellent prices. Check out our
specials: www.ldelectronics.com.au
OATLEY ELECTRONICS
www.oatleyelectronics.com
GET A TDA7297 STEREO IC MODULE
+ 4 x FORSTER 50mm 4R speakers
+ a used 12V/3A power supply
for a total of $29 including P+P. OR
Get two of these packs for $39 inc. P+P.
www.oatleyelectronics.com
Phone: 0428600036
SILICON CHIP
VISIT THE NEW TRONIXLABS parts
clearance store for real savings on new
parts at clearance prices, with flat rate
express delivery Australia-wide – go to
https://tronixlabs.com
Lazer Security
PCB PRODUCTION
FOR SALE
For Quality That Counts...
QUALITY COMPONENTS + MORE
The parts clearance sale continues, but
stock is limited, this month check out the
freebies – go to lazer.com.au
ASSORTED BOOKS FOR $5 EACH
Electronics and other related subjects –
condition varies. Some of the books may
have already been sold. See all books at:
siliconchip.com.au/link/aawx
Email for a quote (bulk discount
available), state the number directly
below the photo when referring to a
book: silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au
BUSINESS FOR SALE
Well known Australian electronics
company for a bargain price.
GENUINE BUYERS ONLY
Phone: 0410600330
ADVERTISING IN MARKET CENTRE
Classified Ad Rates: $32.00 for up to 20 words (punctuation not charged) plus $1.20 for each additional word. Display ads in
Market Centre (minimum 2cm deep, maximum 10cm deep): $82.50 per column centimetre per insertion. All prices include GST.
Closing date: 5 weeks prior to month of sale. To book, email the text to silicon<at>siliconchip.com.au and include your name, address
& credit card details, or phone Glyn (02) 9939 3295 or 0431 792 293.
WARNING!
Silicon Chip magazine regularly describes projects which employ a mains power supply or produce high voltage. All such projects
should be considered dangerous or even lethal if not used safely. Readers are warned that high voltage wiring should be carried
out according to the instructions in the articles.
When working on these projects use extreme care to ensure that you do not accidentally come into contact with mains AC
voltages or high voltage DC. If you are not confident about working with projects employing mains voltages or other high voltages,
you are advised not to attempt work on them. Silicon Chip Publications Pty Ltd disclaims any liability for damages should anyone
be killed or injured while working on a project or circuit described in any issue of Silicon Chip magazine.
Devices or circuits described in Silicon Chip may be covered by patents. Silicon Chip disclaims any liability for the infringement of such patents by the manufacturing or selling of any such equipment. Silicon Chip also disclaims any liability for projects
which are used in such a way as to infringe relevant government regulations and by-laws.
Advertisers are warned that they are responsible for the content of all advertisements and that they must conform to the Competition & Consumer Act 2010 or as subsequently amended and to any governmental regulations which are applicable.
siliconchip.com.au
Australia's electronics magazine
March 2023 103
be a short to ground elsewhere. The
capacitor you used does not appear to
be an X2-rated type. Check all the component values, especially around IC3.
Suitable material for
speaker cabinets
I am interested in building the Senator loudspeakers (September 2015;
siliconchip.au/Series/291). The author
suggests making the walls of the cabinets from furniture boards available in
Australia, but in Poland, it is difficult
to find such material. Is it possible to
build the columns simply from MDF or
beech timber, keeping the dimensions?
Also, three sides of the cabinet
(front, top and side) have double thickness. Is this only for aesthetic reasons,
or does it have acoustic significance?
If it has an acoustical significance, can
I simply use thicker material for these
walls? (B. K., Poland)
● It is OK to use MDF or beech; our
construction was based on locally
available materials. The double sides
are for both aesthetic reasons and superior acoustics, so please use the same
Advertising Index
Altronics.................................27-30
Dave Thompson........................ 103
Digi-Key Electronics...................... 3
ElectroneX..................................... 7
Emona Instruments.................. IBC
Hare & Forbes............................. 11
Jaycar.........................IFC, 9, 40-41,
...............................61, 66-67, 86-87
Keith Rippon Kit Assembly....... 103
Lazer Security........................... 103
LD Electronics........................... 103
LEDsales................................... 103
dimensions if possible. You could use
thicker MDF rather than doubling it
up if you prefer.
Currawong transistor
equivalents
Regarding the Currawong 2 × 10W
Stereo Valve Amplifier (November
2014 – January 2015; siliconchip.au/
Series/277), the STX0560 transistors
have been discontinued and are no
longer available. Unfortunately, there
don’t seem to be any 600V TO-92 transistors anywhere. The highest rating I
can find is either 400V or 500V, and
there is no stock until October 2023.
I know the rail is only supposed to
be 310V, but 400V is still too close for
comfort to my mind. Do you know of
any suitable equivalents, or are you
confident that a 400V transistor like
the PHE13003A,412 (currently in
stock at Mouser) will be OK? (T. S.,
Balcatta, WA)
● We think a 400V collector-emitter
rating is sufficient. That’s still a safety
margin of more than 25%. However,
the gain of those transistors is pretty
poor compared to the originals (30 vs
100 <at> 100mA).
Therefore, we recommend also
changing Q1 to a transistor like the
BUJ302A,127. Its higher hfe of about
70, compared to 30 of the original
KSC5603D, will partially compensate
for the lower gains of Q2 & Q3. They
appear to be pin-compatible and the
BUJ302A has a more-than-adequate
1050V, 4A collector-emitter rating.
In fact, the BUJ302A is a great transistor when a high-voltage NPN BJT is
required. It avoids the poor gain problem of most other transistors with similarly high voltage ratings. It is available in both through-hole (TO-220)
and SMD (DPAK) packages, although
the SMD version is currently scarce.
Microchip Technology.............OBC
Oatley Electronics..................... 103
SC Advanced Test Tweezers...... 82
SC Pico W BackPack................ 101
Silicon Chip Shop.................98-99
Silicon Chip Subscriptions........ 13
The Loudspeaker Kit.com............ 6
Tronixlabs.................................. 103
Wagner Electronics..................... 89
104
Silicon Chip
Errata and Next Issue
Mouser Electronics....................... 4
Getting back to the topic of the discontinued STX0560 transistors, we’ve
noticed that high-gain, high-voltage
NPN transistors have gone extinct for
reasons we don’t understand. It isn’t
just the high-voltage types; even the
‘garden variety’ BC846C & BC856C are
now unavailable from most vendors.
We wonder if the silicon fabs that used
to make these parts have changed their
processes.
Boost Controller
troubleshooting
I have built the Independent Electronic Boost Controller (siliconchip.
au/link/abhk). The 10W resistor
burns out as soon as 12V is applied
to the board. I have not connected any
inputs. What can be causing this? (L.
N., Johannesburg, South Africa)
● Most likely zener diode ZD2, just
below the 10W resistor, is shorted. Perhaps it is the wrong voltage type or has
been installed the wrong way around.
Trouble locating pin 1
of an IC
I have been unable to locate pin 1 of
the supplied INA282 IC. I checked the
Texas Instruments data sheet, and my
markings don’t correspond, so I have
included a photo of the device for your
opinion. My device has a white bar at
one end; is that indicating the pin 1
end? (B. R., Eaglemont, Vic)
● We checked the TI data sheet, and
all it shows is a chamfered edge on
the pin 1 side and an “ID” in the pin
1 quadrant. Unfortunately, it doesn’t
say what the ID marking is.
That bar must indicate the pin 1 end,
but we suggest you also check for a
chamfer on the expected side. It’s hard
to see the champfer if you are looking
at the IC top-down.
SC
Heart Rate Sensor Module review, February 2023: for safety reasons,
the module should be used with a battery-powered computer that is not
connected to the mains, or any other equipment, during use. We also
advise that the ‘patient’ avoids contact with any other equipment while the
ECG probes are connected.
45V 8A Linear Bench Supply, October-December 2019: the circuit
diagram (Fig.3) on p27 of the October 2019 issue shows the cathode of
D5 connecting to the wrong location. It should instead connect to the VCC
rail, which includes the positive ends of the 4700µF capacitors and the
collectors of Q4-Q7.
Next Issue: the April 2023 issue is due on sale in newsagents by Monday,
March 27th. Expect postal delivery of subscription copies in Australia between
March 24th and April 14th.
Australia's electronics magazine
siliconchip.com.au
“Rigol Offer Australia’s Best
Value Test Instruments”
Oscilloscopes
NEW
200MHz
$649!
New
Product!
Ex GST
RIGOL DS-1000E Series
RIGOL DS-1000Z/E - FREE OPTIONS
RIGOL MSO-5000 Series
450MHz & 100MHz, 2 Ch
41GS/s Real Time Sampling
4USB Device, USB Host & PictBridge
450MHz to 100MHz, 4 Ch; 200MHz, 2CH
41GS/s Real Time Sampling
424Mpts Standard Memory Depth
470MHz to 350MHz, 2 Ch & 4Ch
48GS/s Real Time Sampling
4Up to 200Mpts Memory Depth
FROM $
429
FROM $
ex GST
649
FROM $
ex GST
1,569
ex GST
Multimeters
Function/Arbitrary Function Generators
New
Product!
RIGOL DG-800 Series
RIGOL DG-1000Z Series
RIGOL DM-3058E
410MHz to 35MHz
41 & 2 Output Channels
416Bit, 125MS/s, 2M Memory Depth
425MHz, 30MHz & 60MHz
42 Output Channels
4160 In-Built Waveforms
45 1/2 Digit
49 Functions
4USB & RS232
FROM $
479
FROM $
ex GST
Power Supplies
725
ONLY $
ex GST
Spectrum Analysers
789
ex GST
Real-Time Analysers
New
Product!
RIGOL DP-832
RIGOL DSA Series
RIGOL RSA Series
4Triple Output 30V/3A & 5V/3A
4Large 3.5 inch TFT Display
4USB Device, USB Host, LAN & RS232
4500MHz to 7.5GHz
4RBW settable down to 10 Hz
4Optional Tracking Generator
41.5GHz to 6.5GHz
4Modes: Real Time, Swept, VSA & EMI
4Optional Tracking Generator
ONLY $
749
FROM $
ex GST
1,321
FROM $
ex GST
3,210
ex GST
Buy on-line at www.emona.com.au/rigol
Sydney
Tel 02 9519 3933
Fax 02 9550 1378
Melbourne
Tel 03 9889 0427
Fax 03 9889 0715
email testinst<at>emona.com.au
Brisbane
Tel 07 3392 7170
Fax 07 3848 9046
Adelaide
Tel 08 8363 5733
Fax 08 83635799
Perth
Tel 08 9361 4200
Fax 08 9361 4300
web www.emona.com.au
EMONA
|